2010 Civic Coupe - Hondatechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/VA1010/VA1010O… · ·...

2010 Civic CoupeOwner’s Manual

(Unlinked)

This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web use. This is due to changes

in content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This manual will be replaced with a

hyperlinked version at the end of the model year.

© 2009 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. P/N 00X31-SVA-6400

This owner’s manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

This owner’s manual covers all models ofthe Civic 2-door. You may find descriptionsof equipment and features that are not onyour particular model.

Owner’s Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteuren français, veuillez demander àvotre concessionnaire decommander le numéro de pièce33SVAC40

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

09/07/07 13:48:20 31SVA640_001

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your vehicle, otherproperty, or the environment.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in theinstrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preservesyour investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind thatyour dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems uniqueto your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will bepleased to answer any questions and concerns.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2010 Honda Civic was a wise investment.It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Introduction

i

09/07/07 13:48:27 31SVA640_002

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.

Event Data Recorders

This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone elseexcept as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The datacan be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It mayalso be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.

Introduction

WARNING:

This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. Thesedevices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failureof any airbag system component.

ii

09/07/07 13:48:32 31SVA640_003

－－

－

－－

－

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

on the vehicle.preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of

three signal words: , , or .

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

These signal words mean:

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

Safety LabelsSafety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety SectionInstructions

A Few Words About Safety

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

iii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

09/07/07 13:48:45 31SVA640_004

09/07/07 13:48:48 31SVA640_005

(fluid capacities and tire pressures)

(main controls)

(seat belts, SRS, and child protection)

(indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering column)

(heating and cooling, audio, steering wheel, security, cruise control, and other convenience items)

(fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading)

(engine and transmission operation)

(minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)

(vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)

(warranty and contact information)

(how to order)

(flat tire, jump starting, overheating, and fuses)

Contents

................................................................................................................................................Index . I

..................................................Service Information Summary . last page

...............................................................................................Your Vehicle at a Glance . 3

............................................................Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

..........................................Instruments and Controls . 53

......Features . 115

.......................................................................Before Driving . 251

.........................................................................................Driving . 267

.................................................Maintenance . 289

..............................................Technical Information . 361

..................Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) . 379

..................................................................................Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) . 383

........................................Taking Care of the Unexpected . 337

IND

EX

1

09/07/07 13:48:59 31SVA640_006

A summary of the information youneed when you pull up to the fuelpump.

A convenient reference to thesections in this manual.

How to order manuals and othertechnical literature.

A quick reference to the maincontrols in your vehicle.

Explains the purpose of eachinstrument panel indicator and gauge,and how to use the controls on thedashboard and steering column.

How to operate the heating and airconditioning system, the audiosystem, and other conveniencefeatures.

What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to loadluggage and other cargo.

The proper way to start the engine,shift the transmission, and park.

A summary of the warrantiescovering your new vehicle, and howto contact us for any reason. Refer toyour warranty manual for detailedinformation.

The maintenance minder shows youwhen you need to take your vehicleto the dealer for maintenance service.There is also a list of things to checkand instructions on how to checkthem.

This section covers several problemsmotorists sometimes experience,and details how to handle them.

ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,and technical information.

Important information about theproper use and care of your vehicle’sseat belts, an overview of thesupplemental restraint system, andvaluable information on how toprotect children with child restraints.

Overview of Contents

Contents

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Driver and Passenger Safety

Instruments and Controls

Features

Before Driving

Driving

Maintenance

Warranty and CustomerRelations(U.S. and Canada only)

Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)

Index

Service Information SummaryTaking Care of the Unexpected

Technical Information

2

09/07/07 13:49:20 31SVA640_007

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

If equipped:


Your

Vehicle

ataG

lance

3

GAUGES

INSTRUMENT PANELINDICATORS

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

(P.9, 23)

(P.9, 23)DRIVER’S FRONT AIRBAG

PASSENGER’S FRONTAIRBAG

(P.55, 56)(P.65)

MIRROR CONTROLS

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

AUDIO SYSTEM

CLOCK

MOONROOF SWITCH

A/T model without navigation system is shown.

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

SEAT HEATERSWITCHES

USB ADAPTER CABLE

FUEL FILL DOOR/TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE

(P.75)(P.104)

(P.222)

(P.121)

(P.116)

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKETS (P.110)

(P.142, 152, 195, 206)

(P.101)

(P.106)

(P.81)

(P.102)

(P.254)

(P.253, 91)(P.271)

(P.274)

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

09/07/07 13:49:28 31SVA640_008

＊＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system, refer to the navigation system manual.To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.If equipped.

1 :2 :3 :


4

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

SEL/RESET BUTTON

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

DISPLAY CHANGEBUTTON

NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS

(P.66)

(P.65)

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENTS

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS

HORN

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKET


WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS(P.71)

MIRROR CONTROLS

HEATED MIRRORS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

HEADLIGHTS/FOG LIGHTS /TURN SIGNALS (P.72, 73)

(P.74)

(P.106)

(P.227)

(P.219)

(P.76)

(P.75)

(P.107)

(P.75)

(P.110)

(P.224)(P.220)

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA)SYSTEM OFFSWITCH(P.283)

BLUETOOTHHANDSFREELINKSYSTEM VOICECONTROL BUTTONS

(P.30)

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

1

3

2

3

3

3

3

3

3

09/07/07 13:49:37 31SVA640_009

－

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 11............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 12

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 135. Fasten and Position the Seat

.....................................Belts . 146. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 15.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 16...Additional Safety Precautions . 16

Additional Information About.......................Your Seat Belts . 18

..Seat Belt System Components . 18......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 19

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 19

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 20Additional Information About

...........................Your Airbags . 21......Airbag System Components . 21

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 23

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 27How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 28..How the SRS Indicator Works . 29

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 29

How the Passenger Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 30

.............................Airbag Service . 31...Additional Safety Precautions . 31

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 32

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 32

All Children Should Sit in a.................................Back Seat . 33

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 33

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 35

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 35

...Additional Safety Precautions . 35Protecting Infants and Small

...................................Children . 37.......................Protecting Infants . 37

.........Protecting Small Children . 38.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 39....................Installing a Child Seat . 40

...............................With LATCH . 41.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 43

..............................With a Tether . 45...........Protecting Larger Children . 46

...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 46..................Using a Booster Seat . 47

When Can a Larger Child Sit in.........................................Front . 48

...Additional Safety Precautions . 49.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 50

...................................Safety Labels . 51

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

5

09/07/07 13:49:42 31SVA640_010

－You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat, not the front seat. Infants andsmall children should be restrainedin a child seat. Larger childrenshould use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder belt until they can use thebelt properly without a booster seat

(see pages ).

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

Engaging in mobile phoneconversation or other activities thatkeep you from paying close attention

to the road, other vehicles andpedestrians could lead to a crash.Remember, situations can changequickly, and only you can decidewhen it is safe to divert attentionaway from driving.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.14

32 49

291

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Restrain All Children

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Don’t Drink and Drive

Pay Appropriate Attention to theTask of Driving Safely

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

Control Your Speed

6

09/07/07 13:49:55 31SVA640_011

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting inthe correct position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment, front and rear crushzones, a collapsible steering column,and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

always wearyour seat belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

7

(2)

(6)(4)

(7)

(5)

(2)

(11)

(9)

(10)

(8)(1) (3)

(8)(12)(7)

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zone(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags(9) Side Curtain Airbags(10) Automatic Front Seat Belt

Tensioners(11) Door Locks(12) Front Seat Belt Buckle

Tensioners

09/07/07 13:50:03 31SVA640_012

－－－－

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces and territoriesrequire you to wear seat belts.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including:

frontal impactsside impactsrear impactsrollovers

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument paneland a beeper to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.


Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

What You Should Do:

8

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

09/07/07 13:50:19 31SVA640_013

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).

In addition, your vehicle has sidecurtain airbags to help protect theheads of the driver, front passenger,and passengers in the outer rearseating positions during a moderateto severe side impact (see page

for more information on howyour side curtain airbags work).

23 28

27

CONTINUED

Airbags


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

9

09/07/07 13:50:27 31SVA640_014

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

To dotheir job, airbags must inflate withtremendous force. So whileairbags help save lives, they cancause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.


What you should do:

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

Airbags can pose hazards.

10

09/07/07 13:50:34 31SVA640_015

－

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengers,and teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors are closedand locked.

Your vehicle has a door-open indicator on the

instrument panel to indicate wheneither door is not tightly closed.

Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

Some models have the auto doorlocking/unlocking feature. For moreinformation, see page .

See page for how to lock thedoors, and page for how the door-open indicator works.

32 36

6380

82

CONTINUED

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the Front SeatsIntroduction

Close and Lock the Doors1.

2.D

riverand

Passenger

Safety

11

09/07/07 13:50:47 31SVA640_016

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest. In addition toadjusting the seat, you can adjust thesteering wheel up and down, and inand out (see page ).76

93


Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

12

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

09/07/07 13:50:57 31SVA640_017

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe center of the back of your headrests against the center of therestraint.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See page for how to adjust theseat-backs.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

Have passengers adjust their headrestraints properly as well. Tallerpersons should adjust their restraintas high as possible.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints and how the driver’sand front passenger’s active headrestraints work.

93

96


Adjust the Head Restraints4.D

riverand

Passenger

Safety

13

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

09/07/07 13:51:08 31SVA640_018

This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.Insert the latch plate into the buckle,

then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.


Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.

14

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

09/07/07 13:51:15 31SVA640_019

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and head restraints, andput on their seat belts, it is veryimportant that they continue to situpright, well back in their seats, withtheir feet on the floor, until thevehicle is safely parked and theengine is off.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

If a seat belt does not seem to workproperly, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

18


Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6.Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

15

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

09/07/07 13:51:24 31SVA640_020

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe belt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.


Advice for Pregnant Women Additional Safety PrecautionsTwo people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

16

09/07/07 13:51:34 31SVA640_021

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

If they do,they could be very seriouslyinjured in a crash.


Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.

Never let passengers ride on top ofa folded-down rear seat.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

17

09/07/07 13:51:41 31SVA640_022

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all seating positions.The front seat belts are alsoequipped with automatic seat belttensioners.

If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.

If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

This system monitors the front seatbelts. If you turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position before yourseat belt is fastened, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flash. Ifyour seat belt is not fastened beforethe beeper stops, the indicator willstop flashing but remain on.

When no one is sitting in the frontpassenger’s seat, or a child or smalladult is riding there, the indicatorshould not come on and the beepershould not sound.

If the indicator comes on or thebeeper sounds when the driver’s seatbelt is latched and there is no frontseat passenger and no items on thefront seat, something may beinterfering with the monitoringsystem. Look for and remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any object(s) hanging on the seator in the seat-back pocket.

Any object(s) touching the rear ofthe seat-back.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer.

This system uses the same sensorsas the front airbags to monitorwhether the front seat belts arelatched or unlatched, and how muchweight is on the front passenger’sseat (see pages and ).

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.

22 25

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt System Components

18

09/07/07 13:51:53 31SVA640_023

The lap and shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockableretractor will activate. The belt willretract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockable retractor,unlatch the buckle and let the seatbelt fully retract. To refasten theseat belt, pull it out only as far asneeded.

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in position.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat (see page ).

14

43

CONTINUED

Lap/Shoulder Belt Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

19

09/07/07 13:52:04 31SVA640_024

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully, and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by your dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

The tensioners are designed toactivate in any collision severeenough to cause the front airbags todeploy.

The tensioners can also be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags . In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theextra tension in the seat belt couldbe helpful.

Honda provides a limited warrantyon seat belts. See your

booklet fordetails.

If a side curtain airbag deploysduring a side impact, the tensioneron that side of the vehicle will alsoactivate.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled.

319

do not deploy

HondaWarranty Information

Seat Belt Maintenance


20

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

09/07/07 13:52:14 31SVA640_025

CONTINUED

Airbag System Components

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

21

(1)

(8) (12) (8) (9) (17) (2) (13) (17)(11)

(5)

(4)

(16)(7)

(15)

(4)(5)

(3)

(14)(16)

(10)

(10)

(6)

(1) Driver’s Airbag(2) Front Passenger’s Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Automatic Front Seat Belt

Tensioners(5) Side Airbags(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors(8) Front Impact Sensors(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator(10) Side Impact Sensors (First)(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors(12) SRS Indicator(13) Occupant Detection System (ODS) Unit(14) Front Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners(15) Rear Safing Sensor(16) Side Impact Sensors (Second)(17) Side Curtain Airbags

09/07/07 13:52:22 31SVA640_026

Your airbag system includes:

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact orside impact.

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceiling,above the side windows. The frontand rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page

).

Sensors that can detect whether achild is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and signal the controlunit to turn the airbag off (seepage ).

Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners(see page ).

Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger’sseat. If the weight is about 65 lbs(29 kg) or less (the weight of aninfant or small child), thepassenger’s front airbag will beturned off (see page ).

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

Sensors that can detect whetherthe driver’s seat belt and the frontpassenger’s seat belt are latchedor unlatched (see page ).

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page

).

28

19

2723

25

25

1827

29


22

09/07/07 13:52:32 31SVA640_027

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

Only the driver’s airbag will deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will inflatethe driver’s and front passenger’sairbags, at the time and with theforce needed.

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sfront airbag has been turned off(see page ).

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

25

29

30

CONTINUED


How Your Front Airbags WorkD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

23

09/07/07 13:52:44 31SVA640_028

Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whethersensors detect the occupant iswearing a seat belt or not.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.

If the occupant’s belt is , theairbag will inflate at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

Dual-Threshold Airbags

not latched

latched

Dual-Stage Airbags

less severe

more severe


24

09/07/07 13:52:56 31SVA640_029

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.

If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren or small-statured adults whoride in front.

The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. Although Hondadoes not encourage carrying aninfant or small child in front, if thesensors detect the weight of aninfant or small child (up to about 65lbs or 29 kg), the system willautomatically turn the passenger’sfront airbag off.

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any objects or metal itemsunder the front seats.

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

CONTINUED

Advanced Airbags


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

25

PASSENGER’SSEAT WEIGHTSENSORS

DRIVER’SSEATPOSITIONSENSOR

09/07/07 13:53:08 31SVA640_030

When the passenger airbag getsturned off by the weight sensors, a‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator inthe center of the dashboard comeson (see page ).

Be aware that objects placed onthe passenger’s seat can alsocause the airbag to be turned off.

If the weight sensors detect there isno passenger in the front seat, theairbag is automatically turned off.However, the passenger airbag offindicator in this situation will notcome on.

Back seat passengers should notwedge objects or intentionallyforce their feet under the frontpassenger seat.

If your vehicle is equipped withthe floor mats, make sure the floormat behind the front passenger’sseat is hooked to the floor matanchor (see page ). If it is not,the mat may interfere with theproper operation of the sensorsand operation of the seat.

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

A rear passenger pushing orpulling on the back of the frontpassenger’s seat.

Moving the front seat or seat-backforcibly back against cargo on theseat or floor behind it.

Moving the front seat or seat-backforcibly back against the foldedrear seat.

Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

30320


do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

26

09/07/07 13:53:18 31SVA640_031

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoffsystem designed primarily to protecta child riding in the front passenger’sseat.

Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in front, if positionsensors detect a child has leaned intothe side airbag’s deployment path,the airbag will shut off.

The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, sensors willdetect rapid acceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

CONTINUED


Side Airbag Cutoff SystemHow Your Side Airbags WorkD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

27

09/07/07 13:53:28 31SVA640_032

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid accelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag and activate the seat belttensioner on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.

If the side airbag off indicator comeson (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or another object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

29


How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

28

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

09/07/07 13:53:36 31SVA640_033

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on briefly then goes off. Thistells you the system is workingproperly.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

The SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with your airbags or seat belttensioners.

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenautomatically shut off. It doesmean there is a problem with yourside airbags.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the indicatorshould come on briefly and then gooff (see page ). If it doesn’t comeon, stays on, or comes on whiledriving without a passenger in thefront seat, have the system checked.

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them.

58


How the SRS Indicator Works How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Works

not

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

29

U.S. Canada

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

09/07/07 13:53:49 31SVA640_034

If the indicator comes on with nofront seat passenger and no objectson the seat, or with an adult ridingthere, something may be interferingwith the weight sensors. Look forand remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any object(s) hanging on the seator in the seat-back pocket.

Any object(s) touching the rear ofthe seat-back.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer assoon as possible.

Be aware that objects placed on thefront seat can cause the indicator tocome on.

If no weight is detected on the frontseat, the airbag will be automaticallyshut off. However, the indicator willnot come on.

The passenger airbag off indicatormay come on and off repeatedly ifthe total weight on the seat is nearthe airbag cutoff threshold.

If an adult or teenage passenger isriding in front, move the seat as farto the rear as possible, and have thepassenger sit upright and wear theseat belt properly.

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less(the weight of an infant or smallchild) on the front passenger’s seat.It does there is a problemwith the airbag.


How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

not mean

30

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

09/07/07 13:54:01 31SVA640_035

If water oranother liquid soaks into the seat-back, it can prevent the side airbagcutoff system from workingproperly.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact HondaAutomobile Customer Service at(800) 999-1009.

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor, the frontpassenger’s weight sensors, thefront seat belt tensioners, and allseat belts and their anchors wornduring a crash to make sure theyare operating properly.

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. Anyseat belt tensioner that activatesmust also be replaced.

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by an authorized dealer ora knowledgeable body shop.

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.


Do not expose the front passenger’sseat-back to liquid.

Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.

Do not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.

An airbag ever inflates.

The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

Additional Safety Precautions

Airbag ServiceD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

31

09/07/07 13:54:12 31SVA640_036

－－

－

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to protect childpassengers.

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof death of children age 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state,Canadian province and territoryrequires that infants and children beproperly restrained when they ride ina vehicle.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

37 4546 49

properly

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

Protecting Children General Guidelines

32

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

09/07/07 13:54:22 31SVA640_037

－

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt (see page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren).

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.Even though your vehicle has an

advanced front airbag system thatautomatically turns the passenger’sfront airbag off under certaincircumstances (see page ), pleasefollow these guidelines:

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat. Somestates have laws restricting wherechildren may ride.

Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

46

30

CONTINUED

Children who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Small Children

Larger Children

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

Infants

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

33

09/07/07 13:54:36 31SVA640_038

－

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

U.S. Models

Canadian Models


34

DASHBOARD

SUN VISORS

SUN VISORS

09/07/07 13:54:53 31SVA640_039

－

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or a small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

Your vehicle has a back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren, and a child must ride infront:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.


If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visual contact,we strongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

15

14

46

93

CONTINUED

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

Additional Safety PrecautionsNever hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Never let two children use thesame seat belt.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

35

09/07/07 13:55:06 31SVA640_040

－

Children who play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles. Know how tooperate the emergency trunkopener and decide if your childrenshould be shown how to use thisfeature (see page ).

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the trunk, whichcan lead to accidental injury ordeath.

If a child wraps a looseseat belt around their neck, theycan be seriously or fatally injured.(See pages and for how toactivate and deactivate thelockable retractor.)

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates, Canadian provinces andterritories, and can be veryhazardous.

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition switch can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

43 44

92


Lock both doors and the trunkwhen your vehicle is not in use.

Keep vehicle keys/remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

Make sure any unused seat beltthat a child can reach is buckled,the lockable retractor is activated,and the belt is fully retracted andlocked.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.

36

09/07/07 13:55:12 31SVA640_041

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat, and the child is at leastone year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving their seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theirseat-back in the desired position.

It can also interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.

CONTINUED

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Rear-facing Child Seat Placement

Never put arear-facing child seat in the frontseat.

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

37

09/07/07 13:55:23 31SVA640_042

In any of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat directly behind thefront passenger’s seat, move the seatas far forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to cause veryserious or fatal injuries.

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

We also recommend that a smallchild use the child seat until the childreaches the weight or height limitfor the seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

Many states, Canadian provinces andterritories allow a child one year ofage or older who also meets theminimum size and weightrequirements to transition from arear-facing child seat to a forwardfacing seat. Know the requirementswhere you are driving and follow thechild seat instructions. Many expertsrecommend use of a rear-facing seatup to age two, if the child’s height

and weight are appropriate for arear-facing seat.

Protecting Small Children

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s airbag can behazardous.

Child Seat Placement

Child Seat Type

38

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

09/07/07 13:55:34 31SVA640_043

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

Whatever type of seat you choose, toprovide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Look for FMVSS 213 or CMVSS213 on the box.

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the two outerseating positions in the back seat.

When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren (LATCH) system.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, and be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

Even with advanced front airbagsthat automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

25

CONTINUED

The child seat should meetFederal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213 or Canadian MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

1.

2.

Selecting a Child Seat

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

39

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

09/07/07 13:55:45 31SVA640_044

After selecting a proper child seatand a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side

movement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for rear-facing child seats.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position or positionswhere the seat will be used.

Installing a Child Seat

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

Secure the child in the child seat.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

1.

2.

3.

3.

Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat

40

09/07/07 13:55:55 31SVA640_045

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren) at the outerrear seats.

Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connector asshown above.

The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.

The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat withLATCH


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

41

LOWER ANCHORS Rigid type

BUTTONS

09/07/07 13:56:06 31SVA640_046

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Other LATCH-compatible seatshave a flexible-type connector asshown above.

Adjust the head restraint to itslowest position. Route the tetherstrap over the head restraint,making sure the strap is nottwisted.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchor, then tighten thestrap as instructed by the childseat maker.

4.

6.

5.

7.


42

Flexible type

TETHER STRAP HOOK

ANCHOR

09/07/07 13:56:15 31SVA640_047

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle and remove any slack fromthe lap portion of the belt.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

1. 2.

3.

CONTINUED


Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

43

09/07/07 13:56:24 31SVA640_048

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

To deactivate the lockable retractorand remove a child seat, unlatch thebuckle, unroute the seat belt, and letthe belt fully retract.

4. 5.


44

09/07/07 13:56:31 31SVA640_049

A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe back seat, using one of theanchorage points shown above.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), adjust thehead restraint to its lowestposition, then route the tetherstrap over the head restraint.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

Lift the anchor cover, then attachthe tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the strap isnot twisted.

1.

2.

3.43

Installing a Child Seat with aTether


Using an AnchorD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

45

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS

COVER

TETHERSTRAPHOOK

Front Front

ANCHOR

ANCHOR

Outer position Center position

TETHER STRAPHOOK

ANCHOR

09/07/07 13:56:41 31SVA640_050

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear the lap/shoulder belt.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

1.

2.

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Larger Children

46

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

09/07/07 13:56:50 31SVA640_051

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-

facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

Some states, Canadian provinces andterritories also require children touse a booster seat until they reach agiven age or weight (e.g., 6 years or60 lbs). Be sure to check currentlaws in the states, provinces orterritories where you intend to drive.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster seat meetsfederal safety standards (see page

) and that you follow the boosterseat maker’s instructions.

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible, and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

3.

4.

5.

39

CONTINUED

Using a Booster Seat


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

47

09/07/07 13:57:01 31SVA640_052

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,with or without the child sitting on abooster seat, the child should not sitin front.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in the back seat.

14 46

When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront

Physical Size

Maturity


48

09/07/07 13:57:11 31SVA640_053

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.


Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

49

09/07/07 13:57:23 31SVA640_054

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. Carbonmonoxide should not enter thevehicle in normal driving if youmaintain your vehicle properly andfollow the information on this page.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

With the trunk open, airflow can pullexhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetrunk open, open all the windows andset the heating and cooling systemas shown below.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the heatingand cooling system as follows:

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.

You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.

The vehicle was in a collision thatmay have damaged the underside.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

50

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

09/07/07 13:57:33 31SVA640_055

CONTINUED

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury or death. Read these labelscarefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read (except for the U.S.dashboard label which may beremoved by the owner), contact yourdealer for a replacement.

U.S. modelsU.S. models only

Canadian models

Safety Labels

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

51

RADIATOR CAP

SUN VISORDASHBOARD

09/07/07 13:57:53 31SVA640_056

Canadian modelsU.S. models

Safety Labels

52

DOORJAMBS

09/07/07 13:58:03 31SVA640_057

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 54............................Instrument Panel . 55

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 57.............................................Gauges . 65

..............Display Change Button . 66.....................................Odometer . 66...................................Trip Meter . 66

Outside Temperature...................................Indicator . 67..................................Fuel Gauge . 68

...................Temperature Gauge . 68..........Check Fuel Cap Message . 68

..................Maintenance Minder . 69Controls Near the Steering

...........................................Wheel . 70.Windshield Wipers and Washers . 71

.........Turn Signals and Headlights . 72........................................Fog Lights . 73

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 74.................Hazard Warning Button . 75.................Rear Window Defogger . 75

........Steering Wheel Adjustments . 76...............................Keys and Locks . 77

........................Immobilizer System . 78................................Ignition Switch . 79

......................................Door Locks . 80......................Power Door Locks . 81

.Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 82.......................Remote Transmitter . 87

................................................Trunk . 91........Emergency Trunk Opener . 92

.................................................Seats . 93..................................Seat Heaters . 101

............................Power Windows . 102.......................................Moonroof . 104

...........................................Mirrors . 106...............................Parking Brake . 107

.........Interior Convenience Items . 108.....................Beverage Holders . 109

.............Console Compartment . 109..................................Glove Box . 109..................................Coat Hook . 110

........Accessory Power Sockets . 110............................Vanity Mirror . 111

...................................Sun Visor . 112...............................Interior Lights . 113..............................Ceiling Light . 113

...................................Spotlights . 113..........................Courtesy Light . 114

Instruments and Controls

Instruments

andC

ontrols

53

09/07/07 13:58:08 31SVA640_058

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

If equipped:

Control Locations

54

INSTRUMENT PANELINDICATORSGAUGES

(P.55, 56)(P.65)

MOONROOF SWITCH

MIRROR CONTROLS

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

A/T model without navigation system is shown.

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE FUEL FILL DOOR/

TRUNK RELEASE HANDLESEAT HEATERSWITCHES

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

(P.75) (P.104)

(P.106)

(P.81)

(P.102)

(P.101)(P.110)

(P.142, 152, 195, 206)USB ADAPTER CABLE

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

AUDIO SYSTEM(P.121)

CLOCK(P.222)

(P.116)

(P.254)

(P.253, 91)

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

09/07/07 13:58:15 31SVA640_059

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

CONTINUEDCanadian DX-G model with M/T has the electric power steering (EPS) indicator (see page 60) next to the immobilizer system indicator.The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for Canadian models are noted in the text.

Instrument Panel

Instruments

andC

ontrolsDX, DX-G (Canada), LX, EX, EX-L

55

LOW FUELINDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEMINDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDERINDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKESYSTEM INDICATOR

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

(P.63)

(P.57)

(P.64)

(P.58)PARKING BRAKE ANDBRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

(P.59)

TRUNK-OPEN INDICATOR

(P.63)DOOR-OPEN INDICATOR

(P.61)LOW TIRE PRESSURE INDICATOR

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS) INDICATOR (P.61)

HIGH BEAMINDICATOR(P.63)

LIGHTS ONINDICATOR(P.63)

: If equipped

SIDE AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR(P.58)

(P.59)

(P.63)

(P.62)

(P.62)

DAYTIMERUNNINGLIGHTSINDICATOR

VEHICLESTABILITYASSIST (VSA)SYSTEMINDICATOR

CRUISE MAININDICATOR

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMINDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR

LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR

VSA ACTIVATIONINDICATOR

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR

(P.62)

(P.62)

(P.57, 349)

(P.57, 349)

(P.57, 350)

(P.60, 291)

(P.58, 351)

(P.64)

09/07/07 13:58:26 31SVA640_060

＊

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for Canadian models are noted in the text.

Instrument Panel

Si

56

REV LIMIT INDICATOR

DOOR-OPEN INDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDERINDICATOR

TRUNK-OPEN INDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR

ELECTRIC POWER STEERING(EPS) INDICATOR

DAYTIME RUNNINGLIGHTS INDICATOR


LIGHTS ON INDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEMINDICATOR

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKESYSTEM INDICATOR

LOW FUELINDICATOR

(P.63)

(P.63)

(P.63)

(P.62)

(P.60)

(P.64) (P.61)

(P.64)

CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR

LOW TIRE PRESSURE INDICATOR

MALFUNCTIONINDICATOR LAMP

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMINDICATOR

(P.62)

(P.61)

(P.59)

(P.57)

(P.63)

(P.63)

(P.58)

(P.61)(P.62)

MAINTENANCE MINDERINDICATOR

(P.59) CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR

TIRE PRESSUREMONITORING SYSTEM(TPMS) INDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR (P.58)

(P.62)

FOG LIGHT INDICATOR

VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR

(P.63)

LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR (P.57, 349)

(P.57, 349)

(P.57, 350) (P.60, 291)

(P.58, 351)

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST(VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR

09/07/07 13:58:35 31SVA640_061

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle. If this indicator comes on when the

engine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .

See page .

If your front passenger does notfasten their seat belt, the indicatorcomes on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

If either of you do not fasten yourseat belt while driving, the beeperwill sound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. It reminds you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.A beeper also sounds if you have notfastened your seat belt.

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belt, the beeper soundsand the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belt before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.

18

349

349

350

Charging SystemIndicator

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Instrument Panel Indicators

Instruments

andC

ontrols

57

09/07/07 13:58:46 31SVA640_062

This indicator has two functions:

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. A beepersounds if you drive with theparking brake not fully released.Driving with the parking brake notfully released can damage thebrakes and tires.

If it stays on after you have fullyreleased the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, therecould be a problem with the brakesystem. For more information, seepage .

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it comes on atany other time, it indicates apotential problem with your frontairbags. This indicator will also alertyou to a potential problem with yourside airbags, passenger’s side airbagcutoff system, side curtain airbags,automatic seat belt tensioners,driver’s seat position sensor, or thefront passenger’s weight sensors.For more information, see page .

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it comes on atany other time, it indicates that thepassenger’s side airbag hasautomatically shut off. For moreinformation, see page .

1.

2.

29

351

29

Parking Brake and Brake SystemIndicator

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Side Airbag Off Indicator


58

U.S. Canada U.S. Canada

09/07/07 13:58:56 31SVA640_063

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on at any othertime, there is a problem with theABS. If this happens, have yourvehicle checked at a dealer. Withthis indicator on, your vehicle stillhas normal braking ability but noanti-lock function. For moreinformation, see page .

When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signal indicatorsand all turn signals on the outside ofthe vehicle flash.

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If an indicator does not blinkor blinks rapidly, it usually meansone of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see pages and ).Replace the bulb as soon as possible,since other drivers cannot see thatyou are signaling.

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. It will then go off ifyou have inserted a properly codedignition key. If it is not a properlycoded key, the indicator will blink,and the engine’s fuel system will bedisabled (see page ).78

280

315 316


Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Turn Signal and Hazard WarningIndicators

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

59

09/07/07 13:59:05 31SVA640_064

If you turn the steering wheel to thefull left or right position repeatedlywhile stopping or driving at very lowspeed, you may feel slightly hardersteering due to overheating of thesteering gearbox.

Continuously driving under thoseconditions could damage the powersteering system.

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Itreminds you that it is time to takeyour vehicle in for scheduledmaintenance. The maintenance mainitems and sub items will be displayedin the information display. See page

for more information on themaintenance minder.

This indicator goes off when yourdealer resets it after completing therequired maintenance service.

This indicator normally comes onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position and goes offafter the engine starts. If it comes onat any other time, there is a problemin the electric power steering system.If this happens, stop the vehicle in asafe place, and turn off the engine.Reset the system by restarting theengine. The indicator will not turnoff immediately. If it does not go offafter driving a short distance, orcomes back on again while driving,take the vehicle to your dealer tohave it checked. With the indicatoron, the EPS may be off, making thevehicle harder to steer.

291


Electric Power Steering(EPS) Indicator

Maintenance MinderIndicator

Si and Canadian DX-G with manualtransmission models

60

09/07/07 13:59:14 31SVA640_065

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on while driving,it indicates that one or more of yourvehicle’s tires are significantly lowon pressure.

If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, check which tirehas lost the pressure, and determinethe cause. If it is because of a flat tire,replace the flat tire with the compactspare (see page ), and have theflat tire repaired as soon as possible.If two or more tires are underinflated,call a professional towing service(see page ). For moreinformation, see page .

If this indicator comes on and stayson at any other time, or if it does notcome on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, thereis a problem with the TPMS. Withthis indicator on, the low tirepressure indicator will not come onwhen a tire loses pressure. Take thevehicle to your dealer to have thesystem checked.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

To protect the engine from damage,never drive with the tachometer inits red zone.

This indicator shows you when theengine speed is near the tachometer’sred zone. When the engine speedgets to near the red zone, theindicator blinks. If you exceed themaximum speed for the gear you arein, the indicator stays on, and youmay feel the engine cut in and outdue to the engine speed limiter (seepage ).

339

358284 273

U.S. models only U.S. models only

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

Low Tire PressureIndicator

Rev Limit Indicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

Si model only

61

REV LIMIT INDICATOR

09/07/07 13:59:27 31SVA640_066

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, or if it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, there is aproblem with the VSA system. Takeyour vehicle to a dealer to have itchecked. Without VSA, your vehiclestill has normal driving ability, butwill not have VSA traction andstability enhancement. See page

for more information on theVSA system.

This indicator has three functions:

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system.

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. See page for moreinformation on the VSA system.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

This indicator comes on when youturn on the cruise control system bypressing the CRUISE button (seepage ).

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

1.

2.

3.

224

224

282282

282

If equipped

If equipped

If equipped If equipped

VSA Activation IndicatorVehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

Cruise Main Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator


62

09/07/07 13:59:42 31SVA640_067

If this indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position and release the parkingbrake, it means there is a problemwith the DRL. There may also be aproblem with the high beamheadlights. Have your vehiclechecked by your dealer.

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator also comes on withreduced brightness when thedaytime running lights (DRL) are on(see page ).

This indicator comes on if eitherdoor is not closed tightly.

This indicator comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this indicator(see page ).

This indicator comes on if the trunklid is not closed tightly.

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0) position withoutturning off the light switch, thisindicator will stay on. A reminderchime will also sound when you openthe driver’s door.

This indicator comes on when youturn on the fog lights. For moreinformation, see page .

72

73

73

307

Canadian models only

If equipped

High Beam Indicator

Door-open Indicator

Trunk-open Indicator Lights On Indicator

Washer Level Indicator

Daytime Running LightsIndicator

Fog Light Indicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

63

09/07/07 14:00:00 31SVA640_068

If equippedThis indicator comes on when thesecurity system is set. See page

for more information on thesecurity system.

This indicator is located in the fuelgauge. It comes on as a reminderthat you must refuel soon.

When the indicator comes on, thereare about 1.9 US gal (7.5 ) of fuelremaining in the tank.When the reading reaches E, there isa very small amount of fuel in thetank.

223


Security System Indicator Low Fuel Indicator

64

LOW FUEL INDICATORSECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

09/07/07 14:00:11 31SVA640_069

＊

＊

To switch the information displaybetween the odometer, trip meter,and outside temperature (ifequipped), and engine oil life andmaintenance service items, press theSEL/RESET button repeatedly.

If equipped:

Gauges

Instruments

andC

ontrols

65

SPEEDOMETER

TRIP METER

INFORMATIONDISPLAY

FUELGAUGE

TACHOMETER

TEMPERATURE GAUGE

SEL/RESET BUTTON

ODOMETER/OUTSIDETEMPERATURE INDICATOR

U.S. model with A/T is shown.

09/07/07 14:00:19 31SVA640_070

Press and hold the display changebutton until you hear a beep. Thespeedometer, trip meter, andodometer readings switch betweenmiles per hour (mph) and kilometersper hour (km/h).

This meter shows the number ofmiles or kilometers driven since youlast reset it.

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays by pressing the SEL/RESET button repeatedly. Each tripmeter works independently, so youcan keep track of two differentdistances.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, your lastselection is displayed.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the SEL/RESETbutton until the number resets to‘‘0.0.’’

This shows the total distance yourvehicle has been driven. It measuresmiles or kilometers.It is illegal under U.S. federal law andCanadian provincial and territorialregulations to disconnect, reset, oralter the odometer with the intent tochange the number of miles orkilometers indicated.

The odometer and the outsidetemperature indicator (if equipped)use the same display. To switch thedisplay between them, press theSEL/RESET button repeatedly.When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, your lastselection is displayed.

Display Change Button Odometer Trip Meter

Gauges

66

DISPLAY CHANGE BUTTON

09/07/07 14:00:29 31SVA640_071

± ±

－－－－－－－－

This indicator displays the outsidetemperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.models) or Celsius (Canadianmodels). To see the outsidetemperature, press and release theSEL/RESET button until thetemperature is shown on theinformation display.

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. Therefore, thetemperature reading can be affectedby heat reflection from the roadsurface, engine heat, and theexhaust from surrounding traffic.This can cause an incorrecttemperature reading when yourspeed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).

The sensor delays the display updateuntil it reaches the correct outsidetemperature. This may take severalminutes.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

If the outside temperature isincorrectly displayed, you can adjustit up to 5°F in U.S. models ( 3°Cin Canadian models) warmer orcooler.

When it reaches the desired value,release the SEL/RESET button. Youshould see the new outsidetemperature displayed.

Select the outside temperaturedisplay, then press and hold theSEL/RESET button for 10 seconds.The following sequence will appearfor 1 second each: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 5,

4, 3, 2, 1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2,3, 3, 2, 1, 0 (Canada).

The temperature must bestabilized before doing thisprocedure.

If equippedOutside Temperature Indicator

Gauges

Instruments

andC

ontrols

67

NOTE:

09/07/07 14:00:38 31SVA640_072

This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount.

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the reading should rise toabout the middle of the gauge. Insevere driving conditions, such asvery hot weather or a long period ofuphill driving, the reading may riseinto the upper half of the gauge. If itreaches the red (Hot) mark, pullsafely to the side of the road. Seepage for instructions andprecautions on checking the enginecooling system.

Your vehicle’s onboard diagnosticsystem will detect a loose or missingfuel fill cap as an evaporative systemleak. The first time a leak is detecteda ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ messageappears on the information display.Turn the engine off, and confirm thefuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosenit, then retighten it until it clicks atleast once. The message should gooff after several days of normaldriving once you tighten or replacethe fuel fill cap. To scroll to anotherdisplay, press the SEL/RESETbutton. The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’message will appear each time yourestart the engine until the systemturns the message off.

347

Fuel Gauge Temperature Gauge Check Fuel Cap Message

Gauges

68

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

09/07/07 14:00:46 31SVA640_073

The information display in theinstrument panel shows you theengine oil life and maintenanceservice items when the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position. Thisinformation helps to keep you awareof the periodic maintenance yourvehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving. Refer to page formore information.

If the system still detects a leak inyour vehicle’s evaporative emissionssystem, the malfunction indicatorlamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fillcap was not already tightened, turnthe engine off, and check orretighten the fuel fill cap until itclicks at least once. The MIL shouldgo off after several days of normaldriving once the cap is tightened orreplaced. If the MIL does not go off,have your vehicle inspected by adealer. For more information, seepage .350

291

Maintenance Minder

Gauges

Instruments

andC

ontrols

69

09/07/07 14:00:52 31SVA640_074

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊＊

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.If equipped.Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.

1 :2 :3 :

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

70

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

HORN

HEATED MIRRORS

REMOTEAUDIOCONTROLS

PASSENGER’S AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

MIRROR CONTROLS

NAVIGATION SYSTEMVOICE CONTROLBUTTONS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKET


AUXILIARY INPUT JACKSTEERING WHEELADJUSTMENTS

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

(P.71)

AUDIO SYSTEM

HEADLIGHTS/FOG LIGHTS /TURN SIGNALS

(P.76)

(P.224)

(P.220)

(P.110)

(P.75)

(P.107)

(P.75)

(P.121)

(P.227)

(P.74)

(P.106)

(P.72, 73)

(P.283)

BLUETOOTHHANDSFREELINKSYSTEM VOICECONTROL

(P.219)

(P.30)

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA) SYSTEMOFF SWITCH

1

2

2

2

32

2

2

2

2

09/07/07 14:00:58 31SVA640_075

－－－

－

－

－

－

－

－

＊

＊

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO Low speedHI High speedWindshield washers

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

The wipers are not activated.

The wipers operate everyfew seconds.

The length of the wiper interval isvaried automatically according to thevehicle’s speed.

Vary the delay by turning theadjustment ring. If you turn it to theshortest delay ( position), thewipers change to low speedoperation when the vehicle speedexceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.

Pull thewiper control lever toward you, andhold it. The washers spray until yourelease the lever. The wipers run atlow speed, then complete a few moresweeps after you release the lever.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

On EX, EX-L and Si models in the U.S.,and LX, EX-L and Si models in Canada

MIST

OFF

INT

LO

HI

Windshield Washer

Windshield Wipers and Washers

Instruments

andC

ontrols

71

ADJUSTMENT RING

: EX, EX-L, Si, Canadian LX

09/07/07 14:01:09 31SVA640_076

－

－

－

＊

＊

＊

Push down on thelever to signal a left turn and up tosignal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever,and hold it. The lever will return tocenter when you release it orcomplete a turn.

Turning theswitch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turnson the parking lights, taillights,instrument panel lights, side-markerlights, and rear license plate lights.

Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights.

When the light switch is in the‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, thelights on indicator comes on as areminder.

This indicator stays on if you leavethe lights on and turn the ignitionswitch to the ACCESSORY (I) orLOCK (0) position.

If you leave the lights on with thekey removed from the ignitionswitch, you will hear a reminderchime when you open the driver’sdoor.

Push the leverforward until you hear a click. Thehigh beam indicator will come on(see page ). Pull the lever back toreturn to the low beams.

To flash the high beams, pull thelever back lightly, then release it.The high beams will stay on as longas you hold the lever back.

Turn signalOffParking and instrument panellightsHeadlights onHigh beamsFlash high beamsFog lights offFog lights on

If equipped

1.2.3.

4.5.6.7.8.

:

63

Turn Signal

Headlights On

High Beams

Turn Signals and Headlights

72

Si model is shown.

09/07/08 17:18:02 31SVA640_077

Turn the fog lights on and off byturning the switch next to theheadlight switch.

With the headlight switch off or inthe position, the high beamheadlights and the high beamindicator come on with reducedbrightness when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position and release the parkingbrake. They remain on until you turnthe ignition switch off, even if youset the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

You can use the fog lights only whenthe headlights are on low beam.They will go off when you turn theheadlights off or onto high beam.

If equipped

Headlights, Fog Lights

Fog LightsDaytime Running LightsInstrum

entsand

Controls

73

09/07/07 14:01:29 31SVA640_078

＋－

The buttons under the left side ventcontrol the brightness of theinstrument panel. Push the orbutton to adjust the brightness.

Separate adjustments can be madewhen the headlights are on and off.

There are six brightness levels.When you push either button, theinformation display indicates thecurrent level. You will hear a tonewhen you reach the maximum orminimum brightness. The displayreturns to the odometer 5 secondsafter you stop adjusting thebrightness.

To reduce glare at night, theinstrument panel illumination dimswhen you turn the light switch to the

or position.

The center of each meter (upper andlower) illuminates with reducedbrightness when you unlock andopen the driver’s door, and then goesback to the selected brightness whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position.

If you insert the key but do not turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position, the illumination turns off inabout 10 seconds.

Instrument Panel Brightness

74

CONTROL BUTTONS

09/07/07 14:01:36 31SVA640_079

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The indicator inthe button comes on to show thedefogger is on. If you do not turn itoff, the defogger will shut itself offafter about 15 minutes. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignitionswitch. You have to turn thedefogger on again when you restartthe vehicle.

The defogger and antenna wires onthe inside of the rear window can beaccidentally damaged. Whencleaning the glass, always wipe side-to-side.

Push the button to turn on thehazard warning lights (four-wayflashers). This causes all fouroutside turn signals and both turnindicators in the instrument panel toflash. Use the hazard warning lightsif you need to park in a dangerousarea near heavy traffic, or if yourvehicle is disabled.

Pushing this button also turns themirror heaters on or off. For moreinformation, see page .107

On U.S. EX-L, Canadian LX, EX-L andSi models

Rear Window DefoggerHazard Warning Button

Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger

Instruments

andC

ontrols

75

U.S. EX-L, Canadian LX, EX-L, Si

09/07/07 14:01:46 31SVA640_080

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up, down, in,and out.

Make any steering wheeladjustments before you start driving.

Move the steering wheel up ordown, and in or out, so it pointstoward your chest, not towardyour face. Make sure you can seethe instrument panel gauges andindicators.

1.

4.

3.

2.

Steering Wheel Adjustments

76

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

09/07/07 14:01:53 31SVA640_081

＊

＊

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle. The valet key worksonly in the ignition and the driver’sdoor lock . You can keep the trunkand trunk release handle lockedwhen you leave your vehicle and thevalet key at a parking facility.

On DX model (except CanadianDX-G), the passenger’s door canalso be locked or unlocked withthe key.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Useonly Honda-approved key blanks.

CONTINUED

Keys and Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

77

MASTER KEY WITHREMOTE TRANSMITTER

MASTER KEY WITHREMOTE TRANSMITTER

KEY NUMBERTAG

VALET KEY(Gray)

VALET KEY(Gray)

KEY NUMBERTAG

VALET KEY(Gray)

MASTER KEYS (Black)

DX model (except Canadian DX-G)

All EX, EX-L and Si models, and CanadianLX model

U.S. LX and Canadian DX-G models

KEY NUMBERTAG

09/07/07 14:02:02 31SVA640_082

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle inoperable.

If you have lost your key and cannotstart your engine, contact yourdealer.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come onbriefly, then go off. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position, remove the key,reinsert it, and turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position again.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine’s fuelsystem is disabled.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

The keys do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

The valet key does not contain abattery. Do not try to take it apart. The system may not recognize your

key’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keychain) is near the ignition switchwhen you insert the key.

On DX model (except Canadian DX-G)

Immobilizer System

Keys and Locks, Immobilizer System

78

Always take the ignition key with youwhenever you leave the vehicle alone.

09/07/07 14:02:14 31SVA640_083

－

－

－－

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from theACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)position.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to the ON (II) position whenyou let go of the key.

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, push it in slightly. Ifyour vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever mustalso be in park.

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), and START (III).

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

CONTINUED

ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

START (III)LOCK (0)

Ignition Switch

Immobilizer System, Ignition Switch

Instruments

andC

ontrols

79

09/07/07 14:02:25 31SVA640_084

To lock the passenger’s door whengetting out of the vehicle, pull outthe lock tab and close the door. Tolock the driver’s door, pull and holdthe outside door handle then pull outthe lock tab. Release the handle,then close the door.

Each door can be locked or unlockedwith the ignition key.

Each door has a lock tab next to theinside door handle. Pull out the tabto lock the door, and push it in tounlock.

When the door is unlocked, the redmark on the lock tab is shown.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) or theACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever must bein Park before you can remove thekey from the ignition switch.

On DX model except Canadian DX-GDoor Locks

Ignition Switch, Door Locks

80

LOCK

UNLOCK

LOCK TAB

RED MARK

Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control of thevehicle.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

09/07/07 14:02:35 31SVA640_085

To lock the passenger’s door whengetting out of the vehicle, pull outthe lock tab and close the door. Tolock the driver’s door, remove thekey from the ignition switch and pullout the lock tab or push the top ofthe master switch, then close thedoor.

To unlock only the driver’s doorfrom the outside, turn the key andrelease it. If you turn it again, bothdoors unlock.

The lock tab on the passenger’s doorlocks and unlocks only that door.Pushing in the driver’s door lock tabonly unlocks the driver’s door.

To lock the doors, push the top ofthe master door lock switch oneither door, pull out the lock tab onthe driver’s door, or use the key inthe outside lock on the driver’s door.

Pushing the bottom of either masterdoor lock switch unlocks both doors.

If you forget and leave the key in theignition switch, lockout preventionwill not allow you to lock the driver’sdoor. With either door open and thekey in the ignition switch, lockingwith the master door lock switch isdisabled. If the driver’s door isclosed, the lock tab on the driver’sdoor is not disabled. Pulling thedriver’s lock tab rearward will lockboth doors. If you try to lock an opendriver’s door by pulling the lock tabrearward, the driver’s door lock tabpops out and unlocks the driver’sdoor.

On LX, EX, EX-L and Si models in theU.S., and DX-G, LX, EX-L and Simodels in Canada

Power Door Locks Lockout Prevention

Door Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

81

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

09/07/07 14:02:45 31SVA640_086

Your vehicle has customizablesettings for the doors toautomatically lock and unlock. Thereare default settings for each of thesefeatures. You can turn off or changethe settings for these features asdescribed on the following pages.

When you customize the setting,make sure your vehicle is parkedsafely, the engine is off, and theparking brake is applied. Make allsettings before you start driving.

The auto door locking feature hasthree possible settings:

The auto door locking isdeactivated all the time.

The doors lock when the vehiclespeed reaches 9 mph (15 km/h).This is the default setting.

The doors lock whenever youmove the shift lever out of thePark (P) position (A/T vehicles).

Make sure the shift lever is in thePark (P) position (A/T vehicles).

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and open the driver’sdoor.

1.

2.

On LX, EX, EX-L and Si models in theU.S., and DX-G, LX, EX-L and Simodels in Canada

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Auto Door Locking To turn off the Auto Door Lockmodes:

Door Locks

82

09/07/07 14:02:57 31SVA640_087

Release the switch, and within 5seconds, turn the ignition switchto the LOCK (0) position.

Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door until you hear a click(after about 5 seconds).

Make sure the shift lever is in thePark (P) position.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and make sure toclose the driver’s door.

Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Keep holding the switch until youhear another click (after about 5seconds).




1.

2.

3.

4.

3.

4.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Locks both doors when the shift lever ismoved out of the Park (P) position (A/Tvehicles only).

Locks both doors when the vehicle’sspeed reaches about 9 mph (15 km/h).

Door Locks

To program the Park Lock mode:

To program the Drive Lock mode:Instrum

entsand

Controls

83

09/07/07 14:03:10 31SVA640_088

On A/T vehicles,

On A/T vehicles,

On A/T vehicles,

push and hold thebrake pedal, and move the shiftlever out of the Park (P) position.

Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Keep holding the switch until youhear another click (after about 5seconds).

Release the switch, and within 5seconds, turn the ignition switchto the ACCESSORY (I) position.

move the shiftlever to the Park (P) position.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position.

The auto door unlocking feature hasfive possible settings:

The auto door unlocking isdeactivated all the time.

This is the default setting.

the driver’s doorunlocks when you move the shiftlever to the Park (P) position withthe brake pedal depressed.

Both doors unlock when you movethe shift lever to the Park (P)position with the brake pedaldepressed (A/T vehicles).

The driver’s door unlockswhenever you turn the ignitionswitch to the ACCESSORY (I)position.This is the default setting on M/Tvehicles.

Both doors unlock whenever youturn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) position.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Door Locks

Auto Door Unlocking

84

09/07/07 14:03:21 31SVA640_089

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and open the driver’sdoor.

Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click,and after about 5 seconds, you willhear another click.




Make sure the shift lever is in thePark (P) position.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

Unlocks the driver’s door or both doorswhen the shift lever is moved into thePark (P) position with the brake pedaldepressed (A/T vehicles only).

CONTINUED

To turn off the Auto Door Unlockmodes:

To program the Park Unlock mode:

Door Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

85

09/07/07 14:03:32 31SVA640_090

Or, until you hear two moreclicks (after about 10 seconds)to activate

.




Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Continue to hold the switch:

push and hold thebrake pedal, then move the shiftlever out of the Park (P) position.

Until you hear another click(after about 5 seconds) toactivate

Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Continue to hold the switch:

Until you hear another click(after about 5 seconds) toactivate

Or, until you hear two moreclicks (after about 10 seconds)to activate

.1.

2.

3.

4.

3.

4.

both doors unlockfeature

Unlocks the driver’s door or both doorswhen the ignition switch is moved out ofthe ON (II) position.

On A/T vehicles,

driver’s door unlockfeature.

driver’s door unlockfeature.

both doors unlockfeature

To program the Ignition SwitchUnlock mode:

Door Locks

86

09/07/07 14:03:43 31SVA640_091

－

－

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Push ittwice to unlock the passenger’s door.Some exterior lights will flash twiceeach time you push the button.

Release the switch, and within 5seconds, turn the ignition switchto the ACCESSORY (I) position.

move the shiftlever to the Park (P) position.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position.

Even if your vehicle’s battery isremoved or goes dead, the systemkeeps the auto door lock/unlocksetting which you selected.

Press this button once tolock both doors. Some exterior lightswill flash once. When you pushLOCK twice within 5 seconds, youwill hear a beep to verify that thedoors are locked and that thesecurity system (if equipped) has set.You cannot lock the doors if eitherdoor is not fully closed or the key isin the ignition switch.

5.

6.

On A/T vehicles,

U.S.: LX, EX, EX-L, SiCanada: DX-G, LX, EX-L, Si

CONTINUED

UNLOCK

LOCK

Remote Transmitter

Door Locks, Remote Transmitter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

87

UNLOCKBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

TRUNKRELEASEBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

LED

UNLOCKBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

LED

U.S.: LXCanada: DX-G

U.S.: EX, EX-L, SiCanada: LX, EX-L, Si

09/07/07 14:03:54 31SVA640_092

－

－

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.

Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.

Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

The ceiling light and the dooractivated spotlights (if equipped)come on when you press theUNLOCK button if the lights are inthe door activated position. If you donot open either door within 30seconds, the light(s) will fade out. Ifyou relock the doors with the remotetransmitter before 30 seconds haveelapsed, the light(s) will go offimmediately.

If you do not open either door within30 seconds, the doors automaticallyrelock, and the security system (ifequipped) sets. You cannot unlock itif the key is in the ignition switch.

Press thisbutton for about 1 second to openthe trunk. You cannot open the trunkif the key is in the ignition switch.

Press and hold thisbutton for about 2 seconds to attractattention: the horn will sound andthe exterior lights will flash for about30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,press any other button on the remotetransmitter, or turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

EX, EX-L, Si and Canadian LX models Remote Transmitter CareTRUNK RELEASE

PANIC

Remote Transmitter

88

09/07/07 14:04:02 31SVA640_093

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doors,replace the battery as soon aspossible.

Battery type: CR1616

Inside the transmitter, separatethe inner cover from the keypadby releasing the two tabs on thecover.

To replace the battery:Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

Separate the transmitter by pryingits middle seam with yourfingernail.

Be careful when removingthis screw as the head of the screwcan strip out.

1.

2. 3.

CONTINUED

Replacing the TransmitterBattery

Remote Transmitter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

89

NOTE:

SCREW

Model with trunk release is shown.

BATTERY

TAB

09/07/07 14:04:13 31SVA640_094

＋

Remove the old battery from theback of the inner cover, and inserta new battery into the back of thecover with the side facing down.

An improperly disposed of batterycan hurt the environment.Always confirm local regulationsfor battery disposal.

Install the parts in reverse order.

4.

5.




Remote Transmitter

90

09/07/07 14:04:21 31SVA640_095

You can open the trunk in two ways:

Pull the trunk release handle tothe left of the driver’s seat.

Keep the trunk lid closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging thelid, and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See

on page .

Press and hold the trunk releasebutton on the remote transmitter.

Use the master key to open thetrunk lock. The valet key does notwork in this lock.

To close the trunk, press down onthe trunk lid.

50

CONTINUED

On U.S. DX and LX models, andCanadian DX and DX-G models

On EX, EX-L, Si andCanadian LX models

CarbonMonoxide Hazard

Trunk

Instruments

andC

ontrols

91

MASTER KEYTRUNK RELEASE HANDLE

Pull

U.S. DX and LX, Canadian DX and DX-G

09/07/07 14:04:30 31SVA640_096

To protect items in the trunk whenyou need to give the key to someoneelse:

Lock the trunk release handlewith the master key.

Give the person the valet key.

Even if the trunk release lever islocked with the master key, you canopen the trunk with the remotetransmitter.

As a safety feature, your vehicle hasa release lever on the trunk latch sothe trunk can be opened from theinside.To open the trunk, push the releaselever in the direction indicated by thearrow.

Parents should decide if theirchildren should be shown how to usethis feature. For more informationabout child safety, see page .

1.

2.

35

On EX, EX-L, Si and Canadian LX Emergency Trunk Opener

Trunk

92

MASTER KEY

09/07/07 14:04:41 31SVA640_097

－

To change the seat-back angle, pullup on the lever on the outside of theseat bottom.

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

To adjust the seat forward orbackward, pull up on the bar underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position, andrelease the bar. Try to move the seatto make sure it is locked in position.

Once a seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make sure itis locked in position.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

11 13Front Seat Adjustments

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

93

09/07/07 14:04:49 31SVA640_098

The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. To raise the seat bottom,repeatedly pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat cushion. To lowerthe seat, push the lever downrepeatedly.

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

To get into the rear seat on thedriver’s side, open the door and pullup on the seat-back adjustment lever.The seat-back will tilt forward toallow easier entry to the rear seat.

To use the console lid as an armrest,slide it to one of its three positions.

On all models except U.S. DX

Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment Armrest Rear Seat Access

Driver’s Side

Seats

94

SEAT-BACK ADJUSTMENT LEVER

09/07/07 14:04:59 31SVA640_099

To get into the rear seat on thepassenger’s side, push downward onthe release lever at the base of theseat-back or pull up on the seat-backadjustment lever. The seat-back willtilt forward to allow easier entry tothe rear seat.

When you push down the releaselever or pull up the adjustment lever,the seat will also move forward.After a passenger gets into the backseat, push the seat-back to theupright position, and push the seatbackwards until it latches. Makesure the seat is fully latched beforesitting in it.

Except U.S. DXPassenger’s Side

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

95

RELEASE LEVER

09/07/07 14:05:05 31SVA640_100

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning aboutimproperly positioning head restraints.

13

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from the likelihood ofwhiplash and other injuries.

They are most effective when youadjust them so the center of the backof the occupant’s head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

The head restraints adjust for height.You need both hands to adjust arestraint. Do not attempt to adjust itwhile driving. To raise it, pull upward.To lower the restraint, push therelease button sideways, and pushthe restraint down.

Head Restraints

Adjusting the Head Restraint

Seats

96

FRONT

LEGS SEAT-BACK

RELEASEBUTTON

09/07/07 14:05:12 31SVA640_101

When a passenger is seated in therear center seating position, thecenter head restraint should beadjusted up or down, to match thepassenger’s height.

To remove a head restraint forcleaning or repair, pull it up as far asit will go. Push the release button,then pull the restraint out of the seat-back.

When reinstalling a head restraint,put the legs back in place. Thenadjust it to the appropriate heightwhile pressing the release button.

Make sure the head restraint locksin position when you reinstall it.

CONTINUED

Removing the Head Restraint

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

97

RELEASE BUTTON

Rear Center Position

LEG

SEAT-BACK

Failure to reinstall the headrestraints can result in severeinjury during a crash.

Always replace the headrestraints before driving.

09/07/07 14:05:20 31SVA640_102

The driver’s and front passenger’sseats have active head restraints. Ifthe vehicle is struck severely fromthe rear, the occupant properlysecured with the seat belt will bepushed against the seat-back and thehead restraint will automaticallymove forward.

This reduces the distance betweenthe restraint and the occupant’s head.It also helps protect the occupants

against the likelihood of whiplashand injuries to the neck and upperspine.

For a head restraint system to workproperly:

Do not hang any items on the headrestraints, or from the restraintlegs.

Do not place any object betweenan occupant and the seat-back.

Install each restraint in its properlocation.

Only use genuine Hondareplacement head restraints.

If the restraints do not return to theirnormal position, or in the event of asevere collision, have the vehicleinspected by a Honda dealer.

After a collision, the activatedrestraint should return to its normalposition.

Active Head Restraints

Seats

98

09/07/07 14:05:30 31SVA640_103

The back of the rear seat folds downto give you direct access to the trunk.The seat-back can be released frominside the trunk.

Remove any items from the seatbefore you fold down the seat-back.

When storing cargo, you can movethe rear center shoulder belt out ofthe way by removing the belt fromthe guide.

To release the seat-back, pull therelease under the trunk panel. Pushthe seat-back down, then let go ofthe release.

For full rear fold-down seat models,the release is located on the driver’sside of the trunk.

For 60/40 split rear fold-down seatmodels, a release is located on eachside of the trunk.

The left and right halves can befolded separately.

CONTINUED

On all models except DX, CanadianDX-G and U.S. LX

Folding Rear Seat

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

99

GUIDE RELEASE

09/07/07 14:05:42 31SVA640_104

Make sure that the folded seat-backdoes not press against the frontpassenger’s seat, as this could causethe weight sensors to workimproperly.

If the rear head restraints get caughton the front seat backs and youcannot fold down the rear seat-backfully, you can remove the headrestraints (see page ).Make sure the removed headrestraints are securely stored.

To lock the seat-back upright, push itfirmly against the trunk panel. Makesure it is latched in place by pullingon the top of the seat.

Make sure all rear shoulder belts arepositioned in front of the rear seat-back, and the center shoulder belt isre-positioned in the guide wheneverthe seat-back is in its upright position.Be sure there are no twists in anyshoulder belt.

Never drive with the seat-backfolded down and the trunk lid open.See onpage .

Make sure all items in the trunk, oritems extending through the openinginto the back seat, are secured.Loose items can fly forward andcause injury if you have to brakehard. See on page

.

Do not put any heavy items on theseat-back when it is folded down.

50

97

263

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Carrying Cargo

Seats

100

09/07/07 14:05:51 31SVA640_105

In the HI setting, the heater turns offwhen the seat gets warm, and turnsback on after the seat’s temperaturedrops.

In the LO setting, the heater runscontinuously. It does not cycle withtemperature changes.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.

Push the front of the switch, HI, torapidly heat up the seat. After theseat reaches a comfortabletemperature, select LO by pushingthe back of the switch. This will keepthe seat warm.

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. Because of the sensorsfor the side airbag cutoff system,there is no heater in the passenger’sseat-back. The ignition switch mustbe in the ON (II) position to use theheaters.

If equipped

Seat Heaters

Instruments

andC

ontrols

101

Passenger’sSeat

Driver’sSeatHEATERS SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

09/07/07 14:06:00 31SVA640_106

－

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position to raise or lower eitherwindow. To open a window, push theswitch down and hold it. Release theswitch when you want the window tostop. Pull back on the switch andhold it to close the window.

To open or close the driver’s windowpartially, push down or pull back onthe window switch lightly and hold it.The window will stop when yourelease the switch.

To close the driver’s window fully,pull back the window switch firmly,then release it. The windowautomatically goes all the way up. Tostop the window from going all theway up, push down on the windowswitch briefly.

To open the driver’swindow fully, push the windowswitch firmly down, then release it.The window automatically goesdown all the way. To stop thewindow from going all the way down,pull back on the window switchbriefly.

The driver’s armrest has a masterpower window control panel. Toopen the passenger’s window, pushdown on the switch and hold it downuntil the window reaches the desiredposition. To close the window, pullback on the window switch. Releasethe switch when the window gets tothe position you want.

Except DX and Canadian DX-G

Power Windows

AUTO

102

MAIN SWITCH

DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

09/07/07 14:06:08 31SVA640_107

－If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or thedriver’s window fuse is removed, theAUTO function could be disabled. Ifthe power window system needs tobe reset after reconnecting thebattery or installing the fuse, do this:

Start the engine. Push down andhold the driver’s window switchuntil the window is fully open.

Pull and hold the driver’s windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor about 2 seconds.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourvehicle checked by your dealer.

When you push the MAIN switch in,the switch is OFF, and thepassenger’s window cannot be raisedor lowered. To cancel this feature,push on the switch again to get it topop out. Keep the MAIN switch offwhen you have children in thevehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating the windowunintentionally.

If the driver’swindow runs into any obstacle whileit is closing automatically, it willreverse direction, and then stop. Toclose the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

The driver’s window autoreverse function is disabled whenyou continuously pull up the switch.

The windows operate for up to 10minutes after you turn off theignition switch. Opening either doorcancels this function.

1.

2.

Except DX and Canadian DX-GAll models

Power Windows

AUTO REVERSEInstrum

entsand

Controls

103

NOTE:

09/07/07 14:06:17 31SVA640_108

－

The moonroof can be tilted up in theback for ventilation, or it can be slidback into the roof. Use the switch onthe front ceiling to operate themoonroof. You must turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position to operate the moonroof.

To tilt up the moonroof, push on thecenter of the moonroof switch. Tostop the moonroof from tilting upfully, push the switch briefly.

To open the moonrooffully, pull back the moonroof switchfirmly, then release it. The moonroofautomatically opens all the way. Tostop the moonroof from opening,push the switch briefly.

To close the moonroof fully, firmlypush the moonroof switch forward,then release it. The moonroofautomatically closes all the way. Tostop the moonroof from closing,push the switch briefly.

To open or close the moonroofpartially, lightly pull the switch backor push it forward and hold it. Themoonroof will stop when you releasethe switch.

To open the moonroof, pull back onthe switch and hold it. Release theswitch when the moonroof reachesthe desired position. To close themoonroof, push the switch forwardand hold it. Release the switch tostop the operation.

If equipped

AUTO

Moonroof

104

MOONROOF SWITCH

Open

Close Tilt

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

09/07/07 14:06:26 31SVA640_109

－ If themoonroof runs into any obstaclewhile it is closing automatically, itwill reverse direction and then stop.To close the moonroof, remove theobstacle, then use the moonroofswitch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing when themoonroof is almost closed. Youshould always check that allpassengers and objects are awayfrom the moonroof before closing it.

The moonroof has a key-off delay.You can open and close themoonroof for up to 10 minutes afteryou turn off the ignition switch. Thekey-off delay cancels as soon as youopen either door.

AUTO REVERSE

Moonroof

Instruments

andC

ontrols

105

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or motor.

09/07/07 14:06:31 31SVA640_110

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns theadjustment switch off to keep yoursettings.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

1.

2.

3.

4.

If equipped

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

Mirrors

106

SELECTOR SWITCH

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

TAB

09/07/07 14:06:41 31SVA640_111

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brakeindicator on the instrument panelshould go out when the parkingbrake is fully released (see page ).

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the rear window defoggerbutton. The indicator in the buttoncomes on as a reminder. Press thebutton again to turn the heaters andthe defogger off.

58

EX-L model in the U.S.LX, EX-L and Si models in Canada

Power Mirror Heaters Parking Brake

Mirrors, Parking Brake

Instruments

andC

ontrols

107

PARKING BRAKE LEVERREAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and hubs. A beeper will sound ifthe vehicle is driven with the parkingbrake on.

09/07/07 14:06:48 31SVA640_112

＊

＊＊

＊＊

Interior Convenience Items

108

VANITY MIRROR

GLOVE BOX

ACCESSORYPOWER SOCKET

COAT HOOK

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

BEVERAGE HOLDER

SUN VISOR

CENTER POCKET

SIDE POCKET

USB ADAPTER CABLE AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

SEAT-BACK POCKET BEVERAGE HOLDER

: If equipped

09/07/07 14:06:53 31SVA640_113

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids candamage the upholstery, carpeting,and electrical components in theinterior.

Open the front beverage holder bysliding the lid.

To open the console compartment,pull up on the lever, and lift the lid.

To close, lower the lid, and push itdown until it latches.

Open the glove box by pulling thehandle to the left. Close it with a firmpush.

If equipped

CONTINUED

Beverage Holders Console Compartment Glove Box


Instruments

andC

ontrols

109

LEVER

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

09/07/07 14:07:03 31SVA640_114

Make sure the coat hook is closedwhen you are not using it. This hookis not designed for large or heavyitems.

To use an accessory power socket,pull up the cover.

This socket is intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

To use a coat hook, pull it down.Close it with a firm push.

To use an accessory power socket,the ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

Coat Hook Accessory Power Sockets


110

COAT HOOK

FRONTAn open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

09/07/07 14:07:13 31SVA640_115

To use the vanity mirror on the backof the sun visor, pull up the cover.

Make sure to put the socket coverback in place to prevent any smallforeign objects from getting into thesocket.

None of the sockets will power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement. When both sockets arebeing used, the combined powerrating of the accessories should be120 watts or less (10 amps).

Another accessory power socket is inthe center console compartment.

On EX, EX-L and Si models withoutnavigation system

Vanity Mirror


Instruments

andC

ontrols

111

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

EX, EX-L and Si

09/07/07 14:07:20 31SVA640_116

To use the sun visor, pull it down.When using the sun visor for theside window, remove the support rodfrom the clip, and swing it out.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the vehicle.


Sun Visor

112

SUN VISOR

09/07/07 14:07:25 31SVA640_117

After both doors are closed tightly,the light dims slightly, then fades outin about 30 seconds.

The ceiling light (with the switch inthe center position) comes on whenyou remove the key from the ignitionswitch. If you do not open a door, thelight stays on, then fades out inabout 30 seconds.

If you leave either door open withoutthe key in the ignition switch, theceiling light goes off after 3 minutes.

The ceiling light has a three-positionswitch: ON, Door Activated, andOFF. In the Door Activated (center)position, the light comes on whenyou:

Open either door.

Unlock the doors with the key orthe remote transmitter.

Turn on a spotlight by pushing thelens. Push the lens again to turn itoff. You can use the spotlights at alltimes.

CONTINUED

If equipped

SpotlightsCeiling Light

Interior Lights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

113

DOOR ACTIVATED

ON

OFF

On models without moonroof

09/07/07 14:07:36 31SVA640_118

The spotlights have a two-positionswitch. In the DOOR position, thelights come on when you open eitherdoor. In the OFF position, the lightsdo not come on.

The spotlights (with the switch inthe DOOR position) also come onwhen you unlock the door with thekey or the remote transmitter, andwhen you remove the key from theignition switch.

The courtesy light between thespotlights comes on when you turnthe parking lights on. To adjust itsbrightness, push the instrumentpanel brightness control buttonsunder the driver’s side vent with theignition switch in the ON (II)position.

If equipped

On models with moonroof Courtesy Light

Interior Lights

114

DOOR ACTIVATED

OFF POSITION

SPOTLIGHT

COURTESY LIGHT

09/07/07 14:07:44 31SVA640_119

＊

＊

The heating and air conditioningsystems in your vehicle provide acomfortable driving environment inall weather conditions.Air conditioning is optional on DX

model.

The standard audio system hasmany features. This sectiondescribes those features and how touse them. (If you have an optionalaudio system, refer to the operatinginstructions that came with it.)

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

The security system helps todiscourage vandalism and theft ofyour vehicle.

.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 116................................Audio System . 121

Audio System (Models without...................navigation system) . 122

..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 123.....................Adjusting the Sound . 126

Playing the XM Radio..................................(Optional) . 127................................Playing a Disc . 132

.......Disc Player Error Messages . 138Optional Disc Changer Error

...................................Messages . 139............................Playing an iPod . 140

.................iPod Error Messages . 148Playing a USB Flash Memory

........................................Device . 149USB Flash Memory Device

........................Error Messages . 156Audio System (Models with

...............navigation system) . 157

...............Voice Control System . 157..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 158

................Playing the XM Radio . 161.....................Adjusting the Sound . 168

................................Playing a Disc . 170.......Disc Player Error Messages . 179

.........................Playing a PC Card . 180.............PC Card Error Messages . 192

............................Playing an iPod . 193.................iPod Error Messages . 202

Playing a USB Flash Memory........................................Device . 203

USB Flash Memory Device........................Error Messages . 213

............AM/FM Radio Reception . 214..................Protecting Your Discs . 216................Remote Audio Controls . 219

......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 220.................Radio Theft Protection . 221

..........................Setting the Clock . 222............................Security System . 223

...............................Cruise Control . 224........HandsFreeLink . 227

Navigation systems are optional onU.S. EX, EX-L and Si models only.

If equipped

Bluetooth

U.S. LX, EX, EX-L and Si models

Features

Features

115

09/07/07 14:07:52 31SVA640_120

＊

＊

＊

＊

Vents, Heating, and A/C

116

MODE BUTTONS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON/HEATED MIRRORS

FAN CONTROL DIAL TEMPERATURE CONTROLDIAL

MAX A/C BUTTON

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

: If equipped

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

09/07/07 14:07:57 31SVA640_121

Turn this dial to increase or decreasethe fan speed and airflow.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the airflow.

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. Theindicator in the button is on whenthe A/C is on.

When the recirculation indicator ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Use the mode control buttons toselect the vents air flows from. Someair will flow from the dashboardcorner vents in all modes.

On some models, this button alsooperates the heated outside mirrors(see page ).

This button turns the rear windowdefogger off and on (see page ).

The system automaticallyturns on the A/C and switches torecirculation mode (see page touse this setting). Air flows from thecenter and side vents in thedashboard. Pressing the , A/C,or any of the mode buttons cancelsMAX A/C, but the A/C stays on.

/

107

75

119

CONTINUED

If equipped

If equipped


Fan Control Dial

Temperature Control Dial

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Recirculation Button

MAX A/C Button

Rear Window DefoggerButton

Mode Control

Features

117

09/07/07 14:08:17 31SVA640_122

Air flows from the floorvents.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode. If you switch the mode from

or to , the systemkeeps the A/C on. The A/Cindicator will not come on if it wasoff to start with.

To turn off the A/C, press the A/Cbutton to illuminate the indicator,then press it again to turn off theA/C.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor vents and defroster vents atthe base of the windshield.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

When you select or ,the system automatically switches tofresh air mode and turns on the A/C.You cannot turn the A/C off in thismode.

The ventilation system draws inoutside air, circulates it through theinterior, then releases it throughvents near the rear window.

Set the temperature to the lowerlimit.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

Select .When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode. If you switch the modefrom or , the systemalso automatically turns on theA/C. This helps prevent thewindows from fogging upunintendedly. The A/C indicatorwill not come on if it was off tostart with (see the first column onthis page).Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.

When you switch to ormode from , the A/C

turns off. But if it was on to startwith, the A/C stays on.

1.

2.3.4.

1.

2.3.


Ventilation

Using the Heater

118

09/07/07 14:08:38 31SVA640_123

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red zone,turn off the A/C until the gaugereading returns to normal.

Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. The indicator in the buttoncomes on when a fan speed isselected.Make sure the temperature is setto maximum cool.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectrecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theair conditioning, and setting the fanto maximum speed in fresh air mode.

To cool the interior with MAX A/C:Set the fan to the desired speed.Select MAX A/C.The system automatically turns onthe A/C, selects , andswitches to recirculation mode.Make sure the temperature is setto maximum cool.

Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry andcan prevent the windows fromfogging up.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

Turn the fan on.Turn on the air conditioning.Select and fresh air mode.Adjust the temperature to yourpreference.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

1.2.3.4.

1.2.

3.

68

If the interior is very warm, Dehumidify the InteriorUsing the A/C


Features

119

09/07/07 14:08:51 31SVA640_124

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

Turning the fan speed control dial allthe way to the left shuts the systemoff.

Keep the system off for shortperiods only.

To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.

When you switch to , fromor , the A/C stays on.

This helps prevent the windows fromrapidly fogging up when the air issuddenly routed away from thewindshield. If you want to turn theA/C off, press and release the A/Cbutton twice. The indicator in thebutton comes on and then goes off.

Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C.The A/C indicator does not comeon if it was off to start with.Select .Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.

To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner vents byrotating the wheel next to each vent.This sends more warm air to thewindshield defroster vents. Once thewindshield is clear, select fresh airmode to avoid fogging the windows.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

Set the fan to the desired speed, orhigh for faster defrosting.Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. TheA/C indicator will not come on if itwas off to start with.Adjust the temperature so theairflow feels warm.Select to help clear therear window.To increase airflow to thewindshield, close the corner vents.

1.

2.3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

/

To Defog and Defrost To Turn Everything OffTo Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows


120

09/07/07 14:09:06 31SVA640_125

An audio system is standard on allmodels except the U.S. DX. Read theappropriate pages (as shown below)to use your vehicle’s audio system.

For vehicles without navigationsystem, see pages through .

For vehicles with navigation system,see pages through .

122 156

213157

Audio System

Features

U.S. EX, EX-L and Si models

U.S. LX modelCanadian DX, DX-G, and LX models

EX, EX-L and Si models

121

Models with navigation system

Models without navigation system

09/07/07 14:09:14 31SVA640_126

To change the letter, select theprevious segment by pushing thebottom of the SEEK button.

Turn the TUNE knob to change aletter.

Push the top of the SEEK buttonto select the next segment, thenturn the TUNE knob to select aletter. Repeat this procedure to setyour message.

Your audio system shows a welcomemessage on the display when youturn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position.

The system will return to the audiodisplay about 10 seconds after youstop selecting a letter.

You can also customize this welcomemessage to your liking with theaudio controls.

You can set up to 16 characters onthe display.

To select a character:

Make sure the audio system is off.

Push and hold the TUNE knob,then push the power/volume knobon the audio control panel. Youwill see the first letter blinking.

2.

3.

4.

1.

Audio System (Models without navigation system)

To Customize a Message

122

EX model is shown.

TUNE KNOBPOWER/VOLUMEKNOB

SEEK BUTTON

09/07/07 14:09:25 31SVA640_127

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)

Features

123

SCANBUTTON

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

PRESETBUTTONS

TUNE KNOB TUNE KNOBPRESETBUTTONS

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

U.S. LX and Canadian DX, DX-G and LX models

SEEK/SKIPBUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBUTTON


AM/FMBUTTON

A.SEL(AUTO SELECT)BUTTON

AM/FMBUTTON

A.SEL(AUTO SELECT)BUTTON

09/07/07 14:09:31 31SVA640_128

－

－

－

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, seek, scan, the presetbuttons, and auto select.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob to the right to tune toa higher frequency, and turn it to theleft to tune to a lower frequency.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.When the system finds a strongsignal, it will stop and play thatstation for about 10 seconds.

The seek functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the or side of theSEEK/SKIP button, then release it.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thepower/volume knob or the AM/FMbutton. Adjust the volume by turningthe power/volume knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction in AM is not available.

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 10 seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

To Select a Station

TUNE

SCANTo Play the AM/FM Radio

SEEK


124

09/07/07 14:09:39 31SVA640_129

－

－

－Each side of the buttons(1 through 6) can store onefrequency on AM, and twofrequencies on FM.

Press the A. SEL button. You will seeA. SEL flashing in the display, andthe system goes into scan mode forseveral seconds. It stores thefrequencies of six AM, and twelveFM stations in the preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset button.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

, press theA. SEL (auto select) button. Thisrestores the presets you originallyset.

For information on AM/FM radiofrequencies and reception, see page

.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storesix stations each.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Pick a preset number (1 6), andhold it until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

If you aretraveling and can no longer receiveyour preset stations, you can use theauto select feature to find stations inthe local area.

1.

2.

3.

4.

214

To turn off auto select

Preset AUTO SELECT


Features

125

09/07/07 14:09:49 31SVA640_130

－

－

－

－

－

－

The SVC mode controls the volumebased on vehicle speed. The fasteryou go, the louder the audio volumebecomes. As you slow down, theaudio volume decreases.

The SVC has four modes: SVC OFF,SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVCHIGH. Turn the TUNE knob toadjust the setting to your liking. Ifyou feel the sound is too loud,

choose low. If you feel the sound istoo quiet, choose high.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the TUNE knob toadjust the setting to your liking.When the level reaches the center,you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.

Adjusts the volume levelbased on the vehicle speed.

This function is set to MID as thedefault setting when the vehicleleaves the factory.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control buttons to adjustthe illumination of the audio system(see page ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is off.

The system will return to the audiodisplay about 5 seconds after youstop adjusting a mode.

Press the TUNE (SOUND) knobrepeatedly to display the SUBW (ifequipped), BASS, TREBLE, FADER,BALANCE, and SVC (speed-sensitive volume compensation)settings.

Adjusts the strength ofsound from the subwoofer speaker.

Adjusts the bass.

Adjusts the treble.

Adjusts the front-to-backstrength of the sound.

Adjusts the side-to-side strength of the sound.

74

If equipped

Speed-sensitive VolumeCompensation (SVC)

SVC

Audio System LightingSUBW

BASS

TREBLE

FADER

BALANCE

Adjusting the Sound (Models without navigation system)

126

09/07/07 14:10:03 31SVA640_131

XM is a registered trademark ofSirius XM Radio , Inc.

XM Radio receives signals from twosatellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, XM Radioallows you to view channel andcategory selections in the display.

Your audio system is capable ofreceiving XM Radio anywhere inthe United States, except Hawaii,Alaska, and Puerto Rico.

Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system)

Features

Optional on U.S. EX, EX-L and Simodels

127

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

XM RADIO BUTTONSCAN BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS TUNE KNOB

DISP BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BUTTON

09/07/07 14:10:10 31SVA640_132

－

－

－

You may experience periods whenXM Radio does not transmit theartist’s name and song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.

Turn the TUNE knob tochange channel selections. Turn theknob right for higher numberedchannels and left for lowernumbered channels. In the categorymode, you can only select channelswithin that category.

In channel mode, you can select allof the available channels. In categorymode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical,etc., you can select all of thechannels within that category.

To switch betweenchannel mode and category mode,press and hold the DISP button untilthe mode changes.

Each time you press and release theDISP button, the display changes inthe following sequence: Channelname, channel number, category,artist name, and music title.

Press either side of the SEEK/SKIPbutton ( or ) to selectanother category.

To listen to XM Radio, turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position. Press theAUX button to select XM Radiomode. Adjust the volume by turningthe knob. The last channel youlistened to will show in the display.

Operating the XM Radio

TUNE

MODE

SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY)


128

09/07/07 14:10:18 31SVA640_133

－

－

－

－

－

－

The scan function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the channels within thatcategory are scanned. To activatescan, press the SCAN button. Thesystem plays each channel innumerical order for a few seconds,then selects the next channel. Whenyou hear a channel you want tocontinue listening to, press thebutton again.

You can store up to 12preset channels using each side ofthe preset button. Each side of thebutton stores one channel from theXM1 band and one channel from theXM2 band.

To store a channel:

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune to a desiredchannel.

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can be selected.In channel mode, all channels can beselected.

Pick a preset number you want forthat channel. Press and hold thebutton until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

Once a channel is stored, press andrelease the proper side of the presetbutton to tune to it.Press the AUX button. Either XM1

or XM2 will show in the display.

Press the AUX button again. Storethe next six channels using steps 2and 3.

XM is loading theaudio or program information.

The channelcurrently selected is no longerbroadcasting.

The encryptioncode is being updated. Wait until theencryption code is fully updated.Channels 0 and 1 should still worknormally.

The signal iscurrently too weak. Move the vehicleto an area away from tall buildings,and with an unobstructed view of thesouthern horizon.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

CONTINUED

SCAN

Preset

XM Radio Display Messages‘‘LOADING’’

‘‘OFF AIR’’

‘‘UPDATING’’

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’


Features

129

09/07/07 14:10:33 31SVA640_134

－

－

－

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.

Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator. Carryinglarge items on a roof rack can alsoblock the signal.

The selected channelnumber does not exist, or is not partof your subscription, or this channelhas no artist or title information atthis time.

There is a problemwith the XM antenna. Please consultyour dealer.

The selectedchannel has no artist or titleinformation at this time.

‘‘ - - - - ’’

‘‘ANTENNA’’

‘‘NO INFO’’


130

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstacles tothe south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

GROUND REPEATER

09/07/07 14:10:40 31SVA640_135

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.Driving in tunnels.Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.

Large items carried on a roof rack.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect XM Radioreception.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Radio. With the ignitionswitch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON(II) position, push the power/volumeknob to turn on the audio system andpress the AUX button. A variety ofmusic types and styles will play.

If you decide to purchase XM Radioservice, contact XM Radio at

, or at1-800-852-9696. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number. To get yourradio I.D. number, turn the TUNEknob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.

Your I.D. will appear in the display.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, you’ll beable to listen to XM Radio broadcasts.XM Radio will continue to send anactivation signal to your vehicle forat least 12 hours from the activationrequest. If the service has not beenactivated after 36 hours, contactXM Radio. In Canada, contact XMCanada .

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theXM Radio mode while you wait foractivation. This should take about 30minutes.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

www.xmradio.com

Receiving XM Radio Service


Features

131

09/07/07 14:10:54 31SVA640_136

Playing a Disc (Models without navigation system)

132

TUNE KNOB

LOAD INDICATORCD BUTTON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB TUNE KNOBPOWER/VOLUME KNOB

SEEK/SKIP BUTTON

EJECTBUTTON

LOAD INDICATOR CD BUTTON

SCANBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

DISPBUTTON


DISPBUTTON

U.S. LX modelCanadian DX, DX-G and LX models

RPT (REPEAT)BUTTON

EJECT BUTTON RPT (REPEAT)BUTTON

RDM(RANDOM)BUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBUTTON

RDM (RANDOM)BUTTON

09/07/07 14:11:01 31SVA640_137

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

To load or play discs, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position.

Maximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

Compatible with variable bitrateand multi-session

The specifications for compatibleWMA files are:

Bitrate:48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps

Sampling frequency:22.05/32/44.1/48 kHz

You operate the disc player with thesame controls used for the radio. Toselect the disc player, press the CDbutton. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in thedisplay.

This audio system can also playCD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed inMP3 or WMA formats. Whenplaying a disc in MP3, you will see‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMAformat, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in thedisplay. You can select up to 255folders or tracks.

If a file on WMA disc is protected bydigital rights management (DRM),the audio unit displays CD FORMAT,and then skips to the next file.

Video CDs and DVDs do not work inthis unit.

The specifications for compatibleMP3 files are:

Compatible with variable bitrateand multi-sessionMaximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)Bitrate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps(MPEG1)8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)

CONTINUED

To Play a Disc


Features

133

NOTE:

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

09/07/07 14:11:17 31SVA640_138

＞

Each time you press the DISP button,the display shows you the text dataon a disc, if the disc was recordedwith text data.

With the folder name, you will seethe FOLDER indicator in the display.The TRACK indicator is shown withthe file or track name.

The display shows up to 16characters of selected text data (thefolder name, file name, etc.). If thetext data has more than 16characters, you will see the first 15characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold the DISPbutton until the next 16 charactersare shown.

Insert a disc about halfway into thedisc slot. The drive will pull the discin the rest of the way to play it. Youoperate the disc player with thesame controls used for the radio.The number of the current track andthe elapsed time are shown in thedisplay. When playing a disc in MP3or WMA, the numbers of the currentfolder and file, and the elapsed timeare shown. The system willcontinuously play a disc until youchange modes.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

You can see the album, artist, andtrack name in the display. If a disc isrecorded in MP3 or WMA, you cansee the folder and file name, and theartist, album, and track tag.

When playing a CD-DA with textdata, the album and track name areshown in the display. With a disc inMP3 or WMA, the display shows thefolder and file name.

When you insert a disc, and thesystem begins to play.

When you change the audio modeto play a disc with text data or inMP3 or WMA.

When a new folder, file, or track isselected.

You will also see some text dataunder these conditions:

If you press and hold the DISPbutton again, the display shows thefirst 15 characters again.

Text Data Display FunctionTo Load a Disc


134

09/07/07 14:11:29 31SVA640_139

－

－

－

－

－

CONTINUED

This feature playsthe tracks within a disc (the fileswithin a folder in MP3 or WMAmode) in random order. To activaterandom play, press and release theRDM button. In MP3 or WMA mode,press the RDM button repeatedly toselect RDM (within a folder randomplay). You will see RDM in thedisplay. Press the RDM button for 2seconds to return to normal play.

Each time you press and release theRPT button, the mode changes fromfile repeat to folder repeat, then tonormal play.

Toselect a different folder, turn theTUNE knob to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Turnthe knob to the right until it clicksonce to skip to the next folder, and tothe left to move to the beginning ofthe previous folder. Turning theTUNE knob more than two clicksskips several folders.

To continuously replaya track (files in MP3 or WMA mode),press and release the RPT button.You will see ‘‘RPT’’ in the display.Press and hold the RPT button for 2seconds to turn it off.

Use the SEEK/SKIP button while adisc is playing to select passages andchange tracks (files in MP3/WMAmode).

Each time youpress and release the side ofthe SEEK/SKIP button, the playerskips forward to the beginning of thenext track (file in MP3 or WMAmode). Press and release the

side to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit again to skip to the beginning ofthe previous track.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the or side of theSEEK/SKIP button.

This feature,when activated, replays all files inthe selected folder in the order theyare compressed. To activate folderrepeat, press the RPT button twice.

You will see F-RPT in the display.The system continuously replays thecurrent folder. Press the RPT buttonagain to turn it off. Pressing theRDM button, or selecting a differentfolder with the TUNE knob alsoturns off the repeat feature.

In MP3 or WMA mode

In MP3 or WMA mode

RANDOM (Random within adisc/folder)

FOLDER SELECTION

REPEAT (TRACK/FILEREPEAT)

SEEK/SKIP

FOLDER-REPEAT

To Change or Select Tracks/Files


Features

135

09/07/07 14:11:42 31SVA640_140

－－－ In MP3 or WMA modeIn MP3 or WMA mode

Thisfeature, when activated, samples thefirst file in each folder on the disc.To activate folder scan, press theSCAN button twice. You will seeF-SCAN in the display.

The system plays the first file in thefirst folder for about 10 seconds. Ifyou do nothing, the system will thenplay the first files in the next foldersfor 10 seconds. After playing the firstfile in the last folder, the systemplays normally.

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP button, selecting a differentfolder with the TUNE knob, orpressing the SCAN button, also turnsoff the folder scan.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays allfiles in the selected folder in randomorder. To activate folder random,press and release the RDM button.You will see F-RDM in the display.The system will then select and playfiles randomly. This continues untilyou deactivate folder random bypressing and holding the RDMbutton for 2 seconds, or by selectinga different folder with the TUNEknob.

Each time you press and release theRDM button, the mode changesfrom folder random play to randomplay (within a folder random play),then to normal play.

The scan function samples all tracks(files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc inthe order they are recorded on thedisc. To activate scan, press andrelease the SCAN button. You willsee SCAN in the display. You will geta 10 second sampling of each track/file on the disc. Press and hold theSCAN button for about 2 seconds toget out of scan mode and play thelast track/file sampled.

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP button also turns off the scanfeature.

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom file scan to folder scan, then tonormal play.

F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN)FOLDER-RANDOMSCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)


136

09/07/07 14:11:51 31SVA640_141

－＋

－＋

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the disc. If you eject the disc,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe disc after 10 seconds and put it inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe CD button.

You can also eject the disc when theignition switch is off.

To play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM/FM button orAUX button on models that are XMRadio capable. Press the CD buttonagain to switch back to the discplayer.

To select the disc changer, press theCD button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed. To selecta different disc, use the preset 4(DISC ) or the preset 1 (DISC )on the preset button. To select theprevious disc, press the preset 4(DISC ), or the preset 1 (DISC )to select the next disc in sequence.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.

If you select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will searchfor the next available disc to load andplay.

You can also press the MODEbutton on the steering wheel tochange modes.

To play an audio unit connected tothe auxiliary input jack or the USBadapter cable when a disc is playing,

press the AUX button. Press the CDbutton again to switch back to thedisc player.

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turningoff the ignition switch, the disc willstay in the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the disc will beginplaying where it left off.

An optional six or eight disc changeris available for your vehicle. Thisdisc changer uses the same controlsused for the in-dash disc player orthe radio.

Load the desired discs in themagazine, and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.

216

To Stop Playing a Disc

Protecting Discs

Operating the Optional DiscChanger


Features

137

09/07/07 14:12:04 31SVA640_142

Cause

The ejected disc will not be reloaded automatically.

ErrorMessage

The chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.For additional information ondamaged discs, see page .

If there is still a problem, the errormessage will appear again. Press theeject button, and pull out the disc.

Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

Solution

217

Track/File format notsupported

Mechanical Error

TOC ErrorFOCUS Error

Current track will skipped. The next supportedtrack or file plays automatically.Press the eject button and pull out the disc(s).Check the disc for serious damage, signs ofdeformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt(see page 217). Insert the disc again. If the codedoes not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot beremoved, consult your dealer. Do not try toforce the disc out of the player.

Disc Player Error Messages (Models without navigation system)

138

UNSUPPORTFORMAT

BAD DISCPLEASE CHECK

OWNERSMANUAL

PUSH EJECTBAD DISC

PLEASE CHECKOWNERSMANUAL

09/07/07 14:12:14 31SVA640_143

ErrorMessage

SolutionCauseThe chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.




217

Press the magazine eject button, and pull themagazine out. If the message does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,see your dealer.Insert disc.

Press the magazine eject button, pull themagazine out, check for an error message, theninsert the magazine again. If the message doesnot disappear, or the magazine cannot be pulledout, see your dealer.Insert disc magazine.

Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

FOCUS Error

No disc in the discmagazine

Mechanical Error

No disc magazine in thedisc changerHigh Temperature

Optional Disc Changer Error Messages (Models without navigation system)

Features

139

09/07/07 14:12:26 31SVA640_144

Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)

EX, EX-L, Si and Canadian LX models

140

TUNE KNOB

SEEK/SKIP BUTTON

EX, EX-L, and Si models

RDM (RANDOM) BUTTON

RPT (REPEAT)BUTTON

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

DISP (DISPLAY)BUTTON

iPod INDICATOR

TUNE KNOB

SEEK/SKIP BUTTON

RDM (RANDOM) BUTTON


iPod INDICATOR

CDBUTTON

AUXBUTTON

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

RPT (REPEAT)BUTTON

AUXBUTTON

CDBUTTON

Canadian LX model

09/07/07 14:12:33 31SVA640_145

The audio system reads and playsplayable sound files on the iPod. Thesystem cannot operate an iPod as amass storage device. The system willonly play songs stored on the iPodwith iTunes.

iPod and iTunes are registeredtrademarks owned by Apple Inc.

iPods compatible with your audiosystem using the USB adapter cableare:

This audio system can select andplay the audio files on the iPod withthe same controls used for the discplayer. To play an iPod, connect it tothe USB adapter cable in the consolecompartment by using your dockconnector, then press the AUXbutton. The ignition switch must bein the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position. The iPod will also becharged with the ignition switch inthese positions.

Use only compatible iPods with thelatest software. iPods that are notcompatible will not work in this audiounit.

CONTINUED

ModeliPod classiciPod with video(iPod 5thgeneration)iPod nanoiPod nano2nd generationiPod nano3rd generationiPod nano4th generationiPod touchiPod touch2nd generation

SoftwareVer. 1.0 or more

Ver. 1.2 or more

Ver. 1.2 or moreVer. 1.1.2 or more

Ver. 1.0 or more

Ver. 1.0.2 or more

Ver. 1.1.1 or moreVer. 2.1.1 or more

To Play an iPod


Features

141

09/07/07 14:12:42 31SVA640_146

Do not connect your iPod using ahub.

Do not keep the iPod in thevehicle. Direct sunlight and highheat will damage it.

Do not use an extension cablebetween the USB adapter cableequipped with your vehicle andyour dock connector.

We recommend backing up yourdata before playing it.

Install the dock connector to theUSB adapter cable securely.

Connect your dock connector tothe iPod correctly and securely.

Pull out the USB connector fromthe holder and remove the cablefrom the clip in the consolecompartment.

Some devices cannot be poweredor charged via the USB adapter. Ifthis is the case, use the accessoryadapter to supply power to yourdevice.

1. 2.

3.


Connecting an iPod

142

NOTE:

DOCK CONNECTOR

USB CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTERCABLE

CABLE

09/07/07 14:12:53 31SVA640_147

－

＞

CONTINUED

If the iPod indicator does not appearin the audio display, check theconnections, and try to reconnect theiPod a few times.

If the audio system still does notrecognize the iPod, the iPod mayneed to be reset. Follow theinstructions that came with youriPod, or you can find resetinstructions online at

Each time you press the DISP button,the display mode switches betweenthe album name, the song/trackname, the artist name, or name off(which turns off the text display).

The display shows up to 16characters of the selected data. If thetext data has more than 17characters, you will see the first 15characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold the DISPbutton until the next 16 charactersare shown.


You can use the SEEK/SKIP buttonwhile an iPod is playing to selectpassages and change files.

Each time you press andrelease the side of the SEEK/SKIP button, the system skipsforward to the beginning of the nextfile. Press and release the sideof the button to skip backward to thebeginning of the current file. Press itagain to skip to the beginning of theprevious file.

To move rapidly within a file, pressand hold either side ( or )of the SEEK/SKIP button.

www.apple.com/ipod.


Text Data Display Function To Change or Select Files

SKIP

Features

143

09/07/07 14:13:05 31SVA640_148

－

You can also select a file from theiPod menu: ALBUM (albums),SONG (songs), P-LIST (playlists),and ARTIST (artists), by using theTUNE knob. Push the TUNE(SOUND) knob to switch the displayto an iPod menu, then turn theTUNE knob to select a desired mode.If you stop adjusting, the displayed

mode is selected after about fiveseconds. The system begins to playthe first file stored in the selectedmode.

Turnthe TUNE knob to select a differentitem in the selected mode. Theselected item will be shown on thedisplay for a few seconds. When youstop turning, the system begins toplay the first file from the selecteditem.


To Select a File from iPod Menu

Selection within a Mode

144

Turn the TUNE knob.

Push the TUNE knob.

09/07/07 14:13:12 31SVA640_149

－

CONTINUED

For example, with the album modeselected, turn the TUNE knob rightor left to select a different album.Turn to the right to skip to the nextalbum, and turn to the left to skip tothe previous album. When the albumis selected, the system begins to playthe first song on that album. Withthe artist mode, turning the knobselects a different artist.

If you select ‘‘ALL,’’ all available fileson the selected menu (album orartist) are played.

If you press and release the TUNE(SOUND) knob repeatedly, thedisplay switches from the iPod menuto the sound settings (see page ).

You can select any type of repeat andshuffle modes by using the RPT andRDM buttons.

Thisfeature continuously plays a file. Toactivate repeat, press and release theRPT button. You will see RPT in thedisplay. Press the button again toturn it off.

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP button or turning the TUNEknob changes the file while keepingthe repeat feature.

126


To Select Repeat or Random Mode:

RPT (Repeat one track)

Features

145

09/07/07 14:13:21 31SVA640_150

－

－

This featureplays all available files in a selectedmode (playlists, artists, albums orsongs) in random order. To activatethis, press and release the RDMbutton. You will see RDM in thedisplay.

Thisfeature plays all available albums in aselected mode (playlists, artists,albums or songs) in random order.The files in each album are played inthe recorded order. To activate this,press and release the RDM buttonrepeatedly until you see F-RDM inthe display.

Each time you press and release theRDM button, the mode changesfrom all random, to album random,then to normal play.

Press and hold the button until youhear a beep to turn off either randommode.

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP button or turning the TUNEknob changes a file while keepingthe random function.

Available operating functions vary onmodels or versions. Some functionsmay not be available on the vehicle’saudio system.


RDM (All Random)

F-RDM (Album Random)

146

NOTE:

RDM INDICATOR

09/07/07 14:13:29 31SVA640_151

＊

＊

You can disconnect the iPod at anytime when you see the ‘‘OK todisconnect’’ message in the iPoddisplay. With the AUX mode, you willsee a ‘‘USB NO DATA’’ message inthe display. Always make sure yousee ‘‘OK to disconnect’’ in the iPoddisplay before you disconnect it.Make sure to follow the iPod’sinstructions on how to disconnectthe dock connector from the USBadapter cable.

The displayed message mayvary on models or versions. Onsome models, there is nomessage to disconnect.

If you reconnect the same iPod, thesystem may begin playing where itleft off, depending on what mode theiPod is in when it is reconnected.

If you see an error message in thedisplay, see page .

To play the radio, press the AM/FMbutton. Press the CD button toswitch to the disc mode (if a disc isloaded). Pressing the AUX buttonswitches the audio mode betweenthe USB and AUX.


:

148


To Stop Playing Your iPod iPod Error MessagesDisconnecting an iPodF

eatures

147

09/07/07 14:13:39 31SVA640_152

If you see an error message on theaudio display while playing an iPod,find the solution in the chart to theright. If you cannot clear the errormessage, take your vehicle to yourdealer.

SolutionError Message

The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the iPod. Thereis a possibility that the files have been damaged.Appears when an unsupported iPod is inserted.

iPod Error Messages (Models without navigation system)

148

UNSUPPORTED

UNSUPPORTED VER

09/07/07 14:13:44 31SVA640_153

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)

EX, EX-L, Si and Canadian LX modelsF

eatures

149

TUNE KNOB

SEEK/SKIP BUTTON

EX, EX-L, and Si models

RDM (RANDOM) BUTTON

RPT (REPEAT)BUTTON

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB


TUNE KNOB

SEEK/SKIP BUTTON

RDM (RANDOM) BUTTON


CDBUTTON

AUXBUTTON

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

RPT (REPEAT)BUTTON

USB INDICATOR USB INDICATORSCANBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

Canadian LX model

AUXBUTTON

CDBUTTON

09/07/07 14:13:51 31SVA640_154

＊

＊

The recommended USB flashmemory devices are 256 MB orhigher, and formatted with the FATfile system. Some digital audioplayers may be compatible as well.

This audio system can select andplay the audio files on a USB flashmemory device with the samecontrols used for the disc player. Toplay a USB flash memory device,connect it to the USB adapter cablein the console compartment, thenpress the AUX button. The ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position.

The audio system reads and playsthe audio files on the USB flashmemory device in MP3, WMA orAAC formats. The USB flashmemory device limit is up to 700folders or up to 65535 files.

Only AAC format files recordedwith iTunes are playable on thisaudio unit.

Depending on the software thefiles were made with, it may not bepossible to play some files, ordisplay some text data.

Depending on the type andnumber of files, it may take sometime before they begin to play.


We recommend backing up yourdata before playing a USB flashmemory device.

Do not keep a USB flash memorydevice in the vehicle. Directsunlight and high heat will damageit.

Do not use an extension cable tothe USB adapter cable equippedwith your vehicle.

Do not connect your USB flashmemory device using a hub.

Do not use a device such as a cardreader or hard drive as the deviceor your files may be damaged.

Some USB flash memory devices(such as devices with security lock-out features, etc.) will not work inthis audio unit.


To Play a USB Flash MemoryDevice

150

NOTE:

09/07/07 14:14:03 31SVA640_155

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－－

－－

Some versions of MP3, WMA, orAAC format may not be supported. Ifan unsupported file is found, theaudio unit displays UNSUPPORTED,then skips to the next file.

In WMA or AAC format, DRM(digital rights management) filescannot be played. If the system findsa DRM file, the audio unit displaysUNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skipsto the next file.

Maximum layers: 8Partition: Top partition only

Supported standards:MPEG4/AAC LCMPEG2/AAC LC

Bitrate:48 320 kbps

The specifications for compatibleAAC files are:

Maximum layers: 8

Bitrate:48 320/VBR kbps (Max 384)

Maximum layers: 8

Partition: Top partition only

Bitrate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320/VBR kbps(MPEG1)


Depending on the type ofencoding and writing softwareused, there may be cases wherecharacter information does notdisplay properly.

The order of files in USB playbackmay be different from the order offiles displayed in PC or otherdevices etc. Files are played in theorder stored in USB flash memorydevice.

Supported standards:MPEG1 Audio Layer3MPEG2 Audio Layer3

Partition: Top partition only


Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz

Sampling frequency:8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 kHz

Supported standards:WMA version 7/8/9

CONTINUED


Features

151

Combining a low sampling f requencywith a low bitrate may result inextremely degraded sound quality.

09/07/07 14:14:23 31SVA640_156

＞Connect the USB flash memorydevice to the USB adapter cablecorrectly and securely.


When the USB flash memory deviceis connected, the display shows a‘‘USB CONNECTED’’ message for afew seconds. If the AUX mode isselected, a ‘‘USB LOAD’’ message isdisplayed for a few seconds.

The display shows up to 16characters of the selected data. If thetext data has more than 17characters, you will see the first 15characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold the DISPbutton until the next 16 charactersare shown.

Each time you press the DISP button,the display mode shows you insequence, the folder name, the filename, the artist tag, the album tag,the track tag and name off (whichturns off the text display).

When the USB flash memory deviceis connected, the USB indicator isshown in the display.


1. 2.

Connecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice

Text Data Display Function


152

USB CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTER CABLE

CABLE

09/07/07 14:14:35 31SVA640_157

－

－

－

－Use the SEEK/SKIP button while aUSB flash memory device is playingto select passages and change files.

Each time you press andrelease the side of the SEEK/SKIP button, the system skipsforward to the beginning of the nextfile. Press and release the sideof the button to skip backward to thebeginning of the current file. Press itagain to skip to the beginning of theprevious file.

Each time you press and release theRPT button, the mode changes fromfile repeat to folder repeat, then tonormal play.

Press and hold the button until youhear a beep to turn off either repeatmode. Pressing either side of theSEEK/SKIP button also turns offthis feature.

Thisfeature replays all the files in theselected folder in the order they arestored. To activate folder repeat,press and release the RPT button(preset 2) repeatedly until you seeF-RPT in the display.

This featurecontinuously plays a file. To activatefile repeat, press and release theRPT button (preset 2). You will seeRPT in the display.

Toselect a different folder, turn theTUNE knob right or left. Turn to theright to skip to the next folder, andturn to the left to skip to the previousfolder. Turning the TUNE knobmore than two clicks skips severalfolders.

To move rapidly within a file, pressand hold either side ( or )of the SEEK/SKIP button.

CONTINUED

To Change or Select Files


SKIP

F-RPT (Folder Repeat)

RPT (File Repeat)

FOLDER SELECTIONF

eatures

153

File repeat mode is shown.

RPT INDICATOR

09/07/07 14:14:45 31SVA640_158

－

－

－

－Thisfeature plays the files in the selectedfolder in random order. To activatefolder random, press and release theRDM button (preset 3). You will seeF-RDM in the display.

This featureplays all the files in random order.To activate all random, press andrelease the RDM button (preset 3)repeatedly until you see RDM in thedisplay.

Each time you press and release theRDM button, the mode changesfrom folder random, to all random,then to normal play.


This featuresamples all files in the selectedfolder in the order they are stored.To activate the scan, press andrelease the SCAN button. You willsee SCAN in the display. You will geta 10 second sampling of the file ineach folder.

Thisfeature samples the first file in eachfolder in the order they are stored.To activate folder scan, press andrelease the SCAN button repeatedlyuntil you see F-SCAN in the display.You will get a 10 second sampling ofthe first file in each folder.

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom file scan to folder scan, then tonormal play.

Press and hold the button until youhear a beep to turn off either scanmode.


F-RDM (Folder Random)

RDM (All Random)

SCAN (File Scan)

F-SCAN (Folder Scan)

154

SCAN INDICATOR

File scan is selected.

09/07/07 14:14:54 31SVA640_159

If you see an error message in thedisplay, see page .

You can disconnect the USB flashmemory device at any time even ifthe USB mode is selected on theaudio system. With the AUX mode,you will see a ‘‘USB NO DATA’’message in the display. Make sure tofollow the USB flash memory device’sinstructions when you remove it.

If you reconnect the same USB flashmemory device, the system willbegin playing where it left off.

To play the radio, press the AM/FMbutton. Press the CD button toswitch to the disc mode (if a disc isloaded). Pressing the AUX buttonswitches the audio mode betweenthe USB and AUX.


156


USB Flash Memory Device ErrorMessages

To Stop Playing a USB FlashMemory Device

Disconnecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice

Features

155

09/07/07 14:15:01 31SVA640_160

If you see an error message on theaudio display while playing a USBflash memory device, find thesolution in the chart to the right. Ifyou cannot clear the error message,take your vehicle to your dealer.

Error Message Solution

The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the USB flashmemory device. There is a possibility that the files have beendamaged.Appears when an unsupported USB flash memory device is inserted.

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models without navigation system)

156

UNPLAYABLE FILE

UNSUPPORTED

09/07/07 14:15:05 31SVA640_161

The audio system can also beoperated by voice control. See thenavigation system manual forcomplete details.

Voice Control System

Audio System (Models with navigation system)

Features

157

TUNE BAR

AUTO SELECTICON

BACKGROUNDICON

SOUND ICON

AM/FMBUTTON

AUDIOBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

FM1 ICON

FM2 ICON

AM ICON

U.S. model

09/07/07 14:15:11 31SVA640_162

－

▲ ▼

▲

▼

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thepower/volume knob or the AM/FMbutton. Adjust the volume by turningthe power/volume knob.

Pushing the AUDIO button will alsoturn on the system.

You can also operate the audiosystem without using the controlicons on the audio screen. Use thecontrol buttons on the left side of thescreen. The status bar appears onthe bottom of the screen each timeyou operate any of the controlbuttons. On the navigation screen,you can also see audio informationby touching the AUDIO INFO iconon the lower half of the screen.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to are displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton, or touch the desired bandicon (FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, or XM2).On the FM band, STEREO will bedisplayed if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, seek, scan, the presetbuttons, and auto select.

Use the TUNE bar to tunethe radio to a desired frequency.Press the side of the bar to tuneto a higher frequency, and press the

side to tune to a lowerfrequency.

Press and hold the or side ofthe TUNE bar until you hear twobeeps to change the frequencyrapidly. Release the bar when thedisplay reaches the desiredfrequency.

For information on XM Radio, seepage .161

To Play the AM/FM Radio To Select a Station

TUNE

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

158

09/07/07 14:15:20 31SVA640_163

－

－

▲ ▼

－

Each preset button’s frequency isshown on the bottom of the audiodisplay.

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 10 seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

Each preset button canstore one frequency on AM and twofrequencies on FM.

The seek functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press and hold the or side ofthe TUNE bar until you hear a beep,then release it.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.When the system finds a strongsignal, it will stop and play thatstation for about 10 seconds.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storesix stations each.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Pick a preset button, and hold ituntil you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Preset

SEEK

SCAN


Features

159

09/07/07 14:15:30 31SVA640_164

－

Press the AUDIO button to view theaudio control icons, then touch theAUTO SEL icon. You will see AUTOSEL flashing in the display, and thesystem goes into scan mode forseveral seconds. It stores thefrequencies of six AM, and twelveFM stations in the preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset button.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

press theAUTO SEL icon. This restores thepresets you originally set.

For information on AM/FM radiofrequencies and reception, see page

.

If you aretraveling and can no longer receiveyour preset stations, you can use theauto select feature to find stations inthe local area.

214

To turn off auto select,


AUTO SELECT

160

09/07/07 14:15:37 31SVA640_165

Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)

Features

161

TUNE BAR PRESET BUTTONS

XM RADIO ICON MODE ICON

PRESET CHANNELNUMBER

SCAN BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

AM/FM BUTTON

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

CD/XM (XM RADIO)BUTTON

JOYSTICK

CHANNELINDICATOR

U.S. model

09/07/07 14:15:43 31SVA640_166

－

XM is a registered trademark ofSirius XM Radio , Inc.

XM Radio receives signals from twosatellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, XM Radioallows you to view channel andcategory selections in the display.When you press and hold theAUDIO button, the display alsoshows all XM information.

To switch betweenchannel mode and category mode,touch the MODE icon. In channelmode, you can select all of theavailable channels. In category mode,such as Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.,you can select all of the channelswithin that category. Each time youtouch and release the MODE icon,the display changes between thechannel mode and the categorymode.

To listen to XM Radio, turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position. Press theCD/XM button to select XM Radio.Adjust the volume by turning thepower/volume knob. The lastchannel you listened to will show inthe display.

Your audio system is capable ofreceiving XM Radio anywhere inthe United States, except Hawaii,Alaska, and Puerto Rico.

You can also operate the radio usingthe control buttons on the left side ofthe screen. The status bar appearson the bottom of the screen eachtime you press any of the controlbuttons. On the navigation screen,you can also see the audioinformation by touching the AUDIOINFO icon on the lower part of thescreen.

You can also change to the XMRadio while you are listening to anFM station, AM station, disc, PCcard, etc., by touching the XM1 orXM2 icon on the audio display.

Operating the XM Radio MODE


162

09/07/07 14:15:52 31SVA640_167

－－

－

－

▼▲

Pick the preset button (icon) youwant for that channel. Press andhold the button (icon) until youhear a beep.

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can be selected.In channel mode, all channels can beselected.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune to a desiredchannel.

Press the XM button. Either XM1or XM2 will show in the display.

To store a channel:

You can store up to 12preset channels using each presetbutton or preset icons on the screen.Each preset button or icon storesone channel from the XM1 band andone channel from the XM2 band.

Press the TUNE bar tochange channel selections. Press

for higher numbered channelsand for lower numberedchannels. In the category mode, youcan only select channels within thatcategory.

Press and holdeither side of the TUNE bar( or ) until you hear a beepto select another category.

The scan function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the channels within thatcategory are scanned. To activatescan, press the SCAN button ortouch the SCAN icon on the screen.The system plays each channel innumerical order for a few seconds,then selects the next channel. Whenyou hear a channel you want to listento, press the button or touch the iconagain.

On the audio display, you will see theselected CHANNEL (number),CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),and TITLE (music title).

You may experience periods whenXM Radio does not transmit theartist’s name and song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

PresetTUNE

CATEGORY

SCAN


Features

163

09/07/07 14:16:05 31SVA640_168

▲ ▼

Touch the CHANNEL LIST icon toswitch the display to the channel listwhich shows all channels in allcategories. Select and touch adesired channel.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

Press the XM button again ortouch the other XM icon (XM1 orXM2) on the audio display. Storethe next six channels using steps 2and 3.

You can also select a desired channelfrom the list shown on the screen.Press the AUDIO button to show theaudio control display on thenavigation screen.

Once a channel is stored, press andrelease the proper preset button(icon) to tune to it. Each presetbutton’s channel is shown on thebottom of the audio display.

To scroll through the display, touchthe or icon on the side of thescreen. To go back to the previousdisplay, touch the Return icon on thescreen.

4.

5.


To Select a Channel from List

164

CHANNEL LIST ICON

09/07/07 14:16:14 31SVA640_169

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

CONTINUED

The signal iscurrently too weak. Move the vehicleto an area away from tall buildings,and with an unobstructed view of thesouthern horizon.

The selected channelnumber does not exist or is not partof your subscription.

To select a desired icon with thejoystick, move it in the appropriatedirection, then press ENT.

XM is loading theaudio or program information.

The channelcurrently selected is no longerbroadcasting.

The encryptioncode is being updated. Wait until theencryption code is fully updated.Channels 0 and 1 should still worknormally.

The selectedchannel has no artist or titleinformation at this time.

There is a problemwith the XM antenna. Please consultyour dealer.

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’XM Radio Display Messages

‘‘ - - - - ’’

‘‘LOADING’’

‘‘OFF AIR’’

‘‘UPDATING’’

‘‘NO INFO’’

‘‘ANTENNA’’


Features

165

09/07/07 14:16:22 31SVA640_170

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.

Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator. Carryinglarge items on a roof rack can alsoblock the signal.

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.


166

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstacles tothe south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

GROUND REPEATER

09/07/07 14:16:29 31SVA640_171

Driving in tunnels.

Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.

Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.

Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

Large items carried on a roof rack.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect XM Radioreception.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Radio. With the ignitionswitch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON(II) position, push the power/volumeknob to turn on the audio system andpress the CD/XM button. A varietyof music types and styles will play.

If you decide to purchase XM Radioservice, contact XM Radio at

, or at1-800-852-9696. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number. To get yourradio I.D. number, press the TUNEbar until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.Your I.D. will appear in the display.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theXM radio mode while you wait foractivation. This should take about 30minutes.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, you’ll beable to listen to XM Radio broadcasts.XM Radio will continue to send anactivation signal to your vehicle forat least 12 hours from the activationrequest. If the service has not beenactivated after 36 hours, contactXM Radio. In Canada, contact XMCanada .


www.xmradio.com


Receiving XM Radio ServiceF

eatures

167

09/07/07 14:16:41 31SVA640_172

－

－

－

－

－

Adjusts the bass.

Adjusts the side-to-side strength of the sound.To adjust the left/right balance,touch the L or R icon.

Adjusts thestrength of sound from thesubwoofer speaker. To adjust thesound strength, touch or

on each side of the adjustmentbar.

The right upper display shows youthe current setting of the soundstrength coming from each speaker.

You can adjust the sound on thenavigation screen. To adjust thesound, push the AUDIO button, thenenter the sound grid by touching theSOUND icon on the display.

Adjusts the front-to-backstrength of the sound. To adjust thefront/rear fader, touch the FR or RRicon.

Adjusts the treble. Toadjust the treble and bass, toucheither or on the treble orbass adjustment bar. The adjustmentbar on the lower right display showsyou the current setting.

BASS

BALANCE

SUBWOOFER

FADER

TREBLE

Adjusting the Sound (Models with navigation system)

168

SOUND ICON

SPEAKER SETTING

BASS/TREBLE SETTING

09/07/07 14:16:54 31SVA640_173

－ You can use the instrument panelbrightness control buttons to adjustthe illumination of the audio system(see page ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is off.

You can select the backgroundscreen to display the sound level.There are three screen modes: level(the sound level is shown with thevertical bars), spectrum analysis (thesound level appears as ripples ofwater), and off. Each time you touchthe background icon, the displaychanges.

The SVC modecontrols the volume based on vehiclespeed. The faster you go, the louderthe audio volume becomes. As youslow down, the audio volumedecreases. Touch the appropriateicon (Low, Mid, Hi, Off) to select themode.

The system will return to the audiodisplay about 10 seconds after youstop adjusting a mode.

You can also select the icon with thejoystick. Move it up and down tomove the highlighting and scrollthrough lists. Select the icon, thenmove the joystick to left or right tochange the setting.

This function is set to MID as thedefault setting when the vehicleleaves the factory. If you feel thesound is too loud, choose low. If youfeel the sound is too quiet, choose Hi.

74

Audio System LightingSVC (speed-sensitive volumecompensation)

Screen Mode

Adjusting the Sound (Models with navigation system)

Features

169

09/07/07 14:17:02 31SVA640_174

＋

－

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)

170

SCAN BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

OPEN BUTTON

CD BUTTON

REWIND BUTTON

FAST FORWARDBUTTON

CD ICON

TUNE BAR

RPT (REPEAT) BUTTON

RDM (RANDOM)BUTTON

JOYSTICK

U.S. model is shown.

SKIP BUTTON

SKIP BUTTON

09/07/07 14:17:07 31SVA640_175

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

You operate the disc player with thesame controls used for the radio. Toload or play discs, the ignition switchmust be in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position.

Video CDs and DVDs do not work inthis unit.


This audio system can also play CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in MP3or WMA formats. When playing adisc in MP3, you will see ‘‘MP3’’ onthe screen. In WMA format, ‘‘WMA’’will appear on the screen. You canselect up to 99 folders and play up to999 tracks. If the disc has a complexstructure, it takes a while to read thedisc before the system begins to playit.



Sampling frequency:22.05/32/44.1/48 kHz

Maximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

Compatible with variable bitrateand multi-session

Bitrate:32/40/48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps

Bitrate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps(MPEG1)8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)


If a file on WMA disc is protected bydigital rights management (DRM),the audio unit displays CD FORMAT,and then skips to the next file.

CONTINUED

To Play a Disc


Features

171

NOTE:


09/07/07 14:17:22 31SVA640_176

The disc player is behind thenavigation screen. To use the discplayer, press the OPEN buttonbeside the screen. The screen foldsback, and the disc player appears.

Insert a disc about halfway into thedisc slot. The drive will pull the discin the rest of the way and begin toplay it.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

To return the screen to the uprightposition, press the CLOSE button onthe edge of the screen panel. Do notuse the folded down screen as a tray.If you put a cup, for example, on thescreen, the liquid inside the cup mayspill on the screen when you go overa bump.

To Load a Disc


172

OPEN BUTTON

DISC SLOT

CLOSE BUTTON

09/07/07 14:17:31 31SVA640_177

－

－

Push the AUDIO button beside thescreen to show the audio display andoperate the disc player.

You can also operate the audiosystem without using the controlicons on the audio screen. Press theCD button. The status bar appearson the bottom of the screen. On thenavigation screen, you can see theaudio information whenever youtouch the AUDIO INFO icon on thelower portion of the screen.

When playing a CD recorded withtext data, the track, album, and artistname are shown on the audio display.When playing a disc in MP3 or WMA,the folder number and name, the filenumber and name, the artist name,and the elapsed time are shown. Thesystem will continuously play a discuntil you change modes. If the discwas not recorded with text data, itwill not be displayed.

You can also select an icon with thejoystick. Move it to left, right, up, ordown to change the highlighting andscroll through lists. Then press ENTon the top of the joystick to selectthe icon.

Each time you press andrelease (preset 6), the playerskips forward to the beginning of thenext track (file in MP3 or WMAmode). Press and release

(preset 5), to skip backward tothe beginning of the current track.Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track.

You can use the preset buttons whilea disc is playing to select passagesand change tracks (files in MP3 orWMA mode). Each preset button’sfunction is shown on the bottom ofthe screen.

To move rapidly withina track/file, press and hold

(preset 4) or (preset 3).

CONTINUED


SKIP

FF/REW


Features

173

PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION

PRESET BUTTONSU.S. model is shown.

09/07/07 14:17:41 31SVA640_178

－

－

－－

▲▼

－

In MP3 or WMA modeIn MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA modeThis feature,

when activated, replays all files inthe selected folder in the order theyare compressed. To activate folderrepeat, press and hold the RPTbutton (preset 1). You will seeFOLDER REPEAT in the display.The system continuously replays thecurrent folder. Press the RPT buttonagain to turn it off. Pressing theRDM button or selecting a differentfolder with the TUNE bar also turnsoff folder repeat.

Thisfeature plays the tracks within a disc(the files within a folder) in randomorder. To activate track random,press and release the RDM button(preset 2). You will see TRACKRANDOM in the display. Press andhold the RDM button for 2 secondsto return to normal play.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays allfiles in each folder in random order,rather than in the order they arecompressed. To activate folderrandom, press the RDM button(preset 2) twice. You will seeFOLDER RANDOM in the display.The system then selects and playsfiles randomly. This continues untilyou deactivate folder random bypressing the RDM button again, or ifyou select a different folder with theTUNE bar.

Toselect a different folder, press eitherside of the TUNE bar to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Pressthe side of the TUNE bar to skipto the next folder, and the side tomove to the beginning of theprevious folder.

To continuously replaya track (file in MP3 or WMA mode),press and release the RPT button(preset 1). You will see TRACKREPEAT in the display. Press andhold the RPT button for 2 seconds toturn it off.

FOLDER REPEAT

TRACK RANDOM (Randomwithin a disc/folder)

FOLDER RANDOMFOLDER SELECTION

TRACK REPEAT (FILEREPEAT)


174

09/07/07 14:17:49 31SVA640_179

－－

CONTINUED

Pressing either SKIP button (preset5 or 6) also turns off scan.

The scan function samples all tracks(files in MP3 or WMA) in the orderthey were recorded. To activate scan,press and release the SCAN button.You will see TRACK SCAN in thedisplay. You will get a 10 secondsampling of each track/file on thedisc. Press and hold the SCANbutton for 2 seconds to get out ofscan mode and play the last track/file sampled.

This feature,when activated, samples all the firstfiles in each folder on the disc inorder. To activate folder scan, pressand hold the SCAN button. You willsee FOLDER SCAN in the display.

The system plays the first file ineach folder for about 10 seconds. Ifyou do nothing, the system thenplays the first file in each folder for10 seconds each. After playing thefirst file of the last folder, the systemgoes to normal play.

Pressing either SKIP button (preset5 or 6), or selecting a different folderwith the TUNE bar, or pressing theSCAN button, also turns off folderscan.

You can also select a track/filedirectly from the folder and file listson the audio display. Press theAUDIO button to show the audiodisplay.

In MP3 or WMA mode Using a Track ListSCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)FOLDER SCAN


Features

175

TRACK LIST ICON

CD ICON


09/07/07 14:17:59 31SVA640_180

▲ ▼

Touch the Track List icon to switchthe display to the folder list, thenselect and touch a desired folder.

The display changes to the file list.Then, select and touch a desired file.

Touch the folder icon on the upperleft of the screen to move to theparent folder.

To scroll through the display, touchthe or icon on the side of thescreen. To go back to the previousdisplay, touch the Return icon on thescreen.


Press the AUDIO button to go backto the normal audio playing display.Pressing the CANCEL button goesback to the previous screen, andpressing the MAP button cancels theaudio control display on the screen.


176

FOLDER ICON

RETURN ICON

FOLDER ICON

RETURN ICON

TRACK/FILE ICON

09/07/07 14:18:09 31SVA640_181

To remove a disc from the audio unit,fold back the screen by pressing theOPEN button (see page ). Pressthe disc eject button ( ) toremove the disc. If you eject the disc,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadit after 10 seconds and put it in pausemode. To begin playing, press theCD button.

To return the screen to the uprightposition, press the CLOSE button.

You cannot close the screen if a discis partially inserted into its slot.

You can also eject the disc when theignition switch is off.

To play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM/FM button ortouch the FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, orXM2 icon. If a PC card is in the audiounit, touch the CARD icon to playthe PC card. Press the CD buttonagain or touch the CD icon to switchback to the disc player.

When playing a CD recorded withtext data, each track name is shownon the audio display. With a discrecorded in MP3 or WMA, the foldernumber is also displayed.

To play an audio unit connected tothe auxiliary input jack or the USBadapter cable when a disc is playing,touch the AUX or USB icon.

If the disc was not recorded with textdata, only the track number is shown.

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turningoff the ignition switch, the disc willstay in the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the disc will beginplaying where it left off.


172

Removing a DiscTo Stop Playing a Disc


Features

177

09/07/07 14:18:20 31SVA640_182

▲▼

Load the desired discs in themagazine, and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.

If you select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will searchfor the next available disc to load andplay.

For information on how to handleand protect discs, see page .An optional six or eight disc changer

is available for your vehicle. Thisdisc changer uses the same controlsused for the in-dash disc player orthe radio.

To select the disc changer, press theCD/XM button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed. To selecta different disc, use either side of theTUNE bar. To select the previousdisc, press the side. To select thenext disc, press the side.

216

Operating the Optional DiscChanger

Protecting Discs


178

09/07/07 14:18:28 31SVA640_183

ErrorMessage

CauseThe chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.




Solution

217

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

TOC Error

High Temperature

Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check if it is inserted correctly in the discplayer.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged(see page 217).Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation (seepage 217).If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the errormessage does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your dealer.Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation (seepage 217).Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

Disc Player Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

Features

179

09/07/07 14:18:39 31SVA640_184

－

＋

Playing a PC Card (Models with navigation system)

180

OPEN BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

SKIP BUTTON

SKIP BUTTONFAST FORWARDBUTTON

REWIND BUTTON

CD/XM BUTTON

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

JOYSTICK

TUNE BAR

PLAY MODEICON

PC CARD ICONTRACK LIST ICON

RDM (RANDOM)BUTTON

RPT (REPEAT) BUTTONU.S. model is shown.

09/07/07 14:18:45 31SVA640_185

－

－

－

－

You operate the PC card player withthe same controls used for the radioand the disc player. To load or play acard, the ignition switch must be inthe ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position.

The PC card player reads and playscards in MP3 or WMA formats.Depending on the format, the screenwill indicate ‘‘MP3’’ or ‘‘WMA’’ whena card is playing. The card limit ofthe player is 99 folders and 999tracks. If the card has a complexstructure, it takes some time for thesystem to begin playing it.

Based on PCMCIA 2.1/JEIDA 4.2,the recommended PC cards for thePC card reader are:

Always use the recommendedmemory card with the appropriateadapter (if an adapter is needed).Some memory cards will not work inthis unit.

When you insert a PC card intothe slot, make sure you put it instraight. If you cannot insert it,remove it, and insert again.

Do not keep PC cards in thevehicle. Direct sunlight and highheat will damage them.

To avoid damaging the cardreader, do not insert hard discdrive cards into the PC card slot.

You cannot close the screen(move it to the upright position)until the PC card is inserted all theway into its slot or removed.

Never insert foreign objects intothe PC card slot.



SD memory card

CompactFlashFlash ATA

Bitrate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps(MPEG1)8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)


CONTINUED

To Play a PC Card


Features

181

NOTE:

09/07/07 14:19:01 31SVA640_186

－

－

－

－


In WMA format, DRM (digital rightsmanagement) files cannot be played.If the system finds a DRM file, itskips that file and plays the nextavailable folder or file.

The PC card slot is behind thenavigation screen. To use the PCcard player, press the OPEN buttonbeside the screen. The screen foldsback, and the PC card slot appears.

Insert a PC card straight into the slot.The drive will read the PC card andbegin to play it.

Return the screen to the uprightposition by pressing the CLOSEbutton on the edge of the screenpanel.

Push the AUDIO button beside thescreen to show the audio display andoperate the PC card player.

You can also operate the audiosystem without using the controlicons on the audio screen. Press anyof the appropriate control buttons.The status bar appears on thebottom of the screen. On thenavigation screen, you can see theaudio information whenever youtouch the AUDIO INFO icon on thescreen.


Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHzBitrate:48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps

Loading a PC Card


182

PC CARD SLOT

09/07/07 14:19:15 31SVA640_187

There are three play modes: Folder,Artist, and Album. Touch the PLAYMODE icon, then choose one of themodes by touching its icon. When amode is selected, it is highlighted inblue.

If play mode information was notincluded in the tracks when theywere added to the card, it will not bedisplayed on the screen.

Folder mode plays tracks in theorder they were added to the card.

Artist mode plays tracks inalphabetical order, by artist andsong title.

Album mode plays albums(folders) in alphabetical order.

CONTINUED

To Select a Play Mode


Features

183

MODE INDICATOR

PLAY MODE ICON

PLAY MODE ICON PLAY MODE ICONARTIST MODE ALBUM MODE

FOLDER MODE

MODE INDICATORU.S. model is shown.

MODE INDICATOR

09/07/07 14:19:27 31SVA640_188

To select a play mode, push theAUDIO button to show the audiodisplay, then touch the PLAY MODEicon on the display.

Select the desired mode by touchingthe appropriate icon, or move thejoystick, then press ENT.

After you select the play mode, thedisplay changes to the selectableplaying menu. If you select‘‘Continue playing the current song,’’the system goes into the selectedplay mode after playing the currentfile.


184

PLAY MODE ICON


09/07/07 14:19:35 31SVA640_189

If you select ‘‘Play a New Track List,’’the system goes into the selectedplay mode immediately and begins toplay the files in order to the new list.

To go back to the previous screen,press the CANCEL button on theright side of the screen. To exit theplay mode screens, press the AUDIObutton.

You can use the preset buttons whilea card is playing to select or changefiles. Each preset button’s function isshown on the bottom of the screen.

Icons on the screen can also beselected with the joystick. Move thejoystick left or right and up or downuntil the icon is highlighted, thenpress ENT on the top of the joystickto select the icon.

CONTINUED



Features

185

PRESET BUTTONS

PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION


09/07/07 14:19:44 31SVA640_190

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

▲▼

Each time you press andrelease (preset 6), the playerskips forward to the beginning of thenext file. Press and release

(preset 5), to skip backward tothe beginning of the current file.Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous file.

To move rapidly withina file, press and hold (preset 4)or (preset 3).

To continuously replaya file, press and release the RPTbutton (preset 1). You will seeTRACK REPEAT in the display.Press the RPT button again to turn itoff.

This feature, whenactivated, replays all the files in theselected folder/artist/album in theorder they are recorded or listed. Toactivate each repeat mode, press andhold the RPT button (preset 1) for 2seconds. You will see FOLDERREPEAT, ARTIST REPEAT orALBUM REPEAT in the display.The system continuously replays thecurrent folder/artist/album. Pressand hold the RPT button for 2seconds again to turn it off. Pressingthe RDM button, or selecting adifferent folder/artist/album withthe TUNE bar also turns off therepeat feature.

This featureplays the files within a folder inrandom order. To activate trackrandom, press and release the RDMbutton (preset 2). You will seeTRACK RANDOM in the display.Press and hold the RDM button for 2seconds to return to normal play.

This feature, whenactivated, plays all files in eachfolder/artist/album in random order,rather than in the order they arerecorded or listed. To activate eachrandom play, press the RDM button(preset 2) 2 times. You will seeFOLDER RANDOM, ARTISTRANDOM or ALBUM RANDOM inthe display.

Toselect a different folder, press eitherside of the TUNE bar to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Pressthe side of the TUNE bar to skipto the next folder, and the side tomove to the beginning of theprevious folder.

SKIP

FF/REW

TRACK REPEAT (FILEREPEAT)

FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUMREPEAT

TRACK RANDOM (Randomwithin a folder)

FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUMRANDOM

FOLDER SELECTION


186

09/07/07 14:19:52 31SVA640_191

－

－The system then selects and playsfiles randomly. This continues untilyou deactivate each random play bypressing the RDM button again, oryou select a different folder/artist/album with the TUNE bar.

Pressing either of the SKIP buttons(preset 5 or 6) also turns off the scanfeature.

The scan function samplesall files on the PC card in the orderthey are recorded. To activate scan,press and release the SCAN button.You will see TRACK SCAN in thedisplay. You will get a 10 secondsampling of each file on the PC card.Press and hold the SCAN button for2 seconds to get out of scan modeand play the last file sampled.

This feature, whenactivated, samples the first file ineach folder/artist/album on the PCcard in order. To activate each scanfeature, press and hold the SCANbutton until you hear a beep. You willsee FOLDER SCAN, ARTIST SCANor ALBUM SCAN in the display.

The system plays the first file in thefolder for about 10 seconds. If you donothing, the system plays the firstfile in each folder, in order, for 10seconds each. After playing the firstfile of the last folder/artist/album,the system returns to normal play.

Pressing either of the SKIP buttons(preset 5 or 6), selecting a differentfolder/artist/album with the TUNEbar, or pressing the SCAN button,also turns off the scan feature.

You can also select a file directlyfrom the folder and track lists on theaudio display. Press the AUDIObutton to show the audio display,then touch the Track List icon. Thefolder list menu appears on thedisplay.

CONTINUED

SCAN

FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUMSCAN


Using a Track ListF

eatures

187

TRACK LIST ICON


09/07/07 14:20:02 31SVA640_192

▲ ▼In artist mode, the artist name is alsodisplayed on the right side of eachselectable icon. Select the desiredfile.

To scroll through the display, touchthe or icon on the side of thescreen. To go back to the previousdisplay, touch the Return icon.

To select a folder, touch its icon onthe screen. The display changes tothe file list. Then, select and touch adesired file. In folder mode, touchthe folder icon on the upper left ofthe screen to move to the parentfolder.


188

RETURN ICON

FOLDER ICON ARTIST NAME

09/07/07 14:20:10 31SVA640_193

CONTINUED


In album mode, the album name isalso displayed on the right side ofeach selectable icon. Select thedesired file.

You can then select any of threemodes to search a file: Title byKeyword, Artist, and Album.

Press the AUDIO button to go backto the normal audio playing display.Pressing the CANCEL button goesback to the previous screen, andpressing the MAP button cancels theaudio control display on the screen.

When you select ‘‘Song Search’’ fromthe track list display, the song searchmenu appears.


Song Search Function Features

189

ARTIST ICON

TITLE BY KEYWORD ICON

RETURN ICON

SONG SEARCH ICON

ALBUM ICON

Folder mode is shown.

ALBUM NAME

09/07/07 14:20:20 31SVA640_194

▲ ▼

Searching for a Song Title by Keyword Searching for a Song by Artist Name

In Title by Keyword mode, enter thetitle name, or any keyword, bytouching the letter icons on thescreen. Touch the List icon to beginthe song search. If you press theCANCEL button on the screen, thedisplay returns to the mode menuwithout doing a search.

To cancel the selected letter, selectthe letter and touch the Delete icon.To select more characters, touch theMore icon. The other character listwill be shown.

After the system searches for a song,a file list is displayed. To scrollthrough the list, touch the oricon on the side of the screen. Selectthe desired file by touching theappropriate icon, or moving thejoystick and pressing ENT.

Select the Artist icon, and the artistlist appears. Select the desired artist,and the artist’s file list is displayed.


190

MORE ICON

DELETE ICON LIST ICON

FILE LIST

ARTIST LIST

09/07/07 14:20:31 31SVA640_195

＊

＊

＊

Searching for a Song by Album Name

Select the Album icon, and thealbum list appears. Select the desiredalbum, and its song list is displayed.You can then select the desired songfrom the list.

If equipped

To play an audio unit connected tothe auxiliary input jack or the USBadapter cable when a PC card isplaying, touch the AUX or USB icon.

To play the radio when a PC card isplaying, press the AM/FM button ortouch the FM1, FM2, AM, XM1 , orXM2 icon. If a disc is in the audiounit, press the CD/XM button ortouch the CD icon to play the disc.Touch the CARD icon to switch backto the PC card player.

If you turn the system off while a PCcard is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turningoff the ignition switch, the card willstay in the drive. When you turn the

system back on, the card will beginplaying where it left off.


When you leave the vehicle, alwaysremove the PC card from the audiounit.

To remove a PC card from the audiounit, fold back the screen bypressing the OPEN button (see page

). Press the eject button ( )to remove the card. If you do notremove it from the slot, you cannotreturn the screen to the uprightposition.

To return the screen to the uprightposition, press the CLOSE button.

You can also eject a card when theignition switch is off.

:172

To Stop Playing a PC Card


Removing a PC Card Features

191

ALBUM LIST

09/07/07 14:20:44 31SVA640_196

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a PC card, findthe solution in the chart to the right.If you cannot clear the errormessage, take your vehicle to yourdealer.


The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the PC card.There is a possibility that the files have been damaged.It appears when the PC card is empty or there are no MP3 or WMAfiles in the PC card. Save the MP3 or WMA files in the PC card.It appears when an unsupported PC card is inserted. The systemsupports CompactFlash card, Flash ATA card, and SanDisk memoryCard Adapter.

PC Card Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

192

FILE ERROR

NO MUSIC

MEDIA ERROR

09/07/07 14:20:49 31SVA640_197

－

＋

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)

Features

193

JOYSTICKPOWER/VOLUMEKNOB

MAP BUTTON

iPod INDICATOR

CD/XM BUTTON

REWIND BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

USB ICON

AUDIO DISPLAY

RPT (REPEAT)BUTTON

RDM (RANDOM)BUTTON

FAST FORWARDBUTTON

SKIP BUTTON

SKIP BUTTON

CANCEL BUTTON


09/07/07 14:20:54 31SVA640_198

iPods compatible with your audiosystem using the USB adapter cableare:

This audio system can select andplay the audio files on the iPod withthe same controls used for the in-dash disc player. To play an iPod,connect it to the USB adapter cablein the console compartment by usingyour dock connector. Press theAUDIO button beside the screen toshow the audio display and touch theAUX icon. The ignition switch mustbe in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position. The iPod will also berecharged with the ignition switch inthese positions.

You can also select an icon bymoving the joystick. Move it to left,right, up, or down to change thehighlighting and scroll through lists,then press ENT on the top of thejoystick to set your selection.

To select the USB mode withoutusing the icon, press the CD/XMbutton repeatedly. The status barappears on the bottom of the screen.

The audio system reads and playsplayable sound files on the iPod. Thesystem cannot operate an iPod as amass storage device. The system willonly play songs stored on the iPodwith iTunes.

iPod and iTunes are registeredtrademarks owned by Apple Inc.

You can select the AUX mode byusing the navigation system voicecontrol buttons, but cannot operatethe play mode functions.

Use only compatible iPods with thelatest software. iPods that are notcompatible will not work in this audiounit.

ModeliPod classiciPod with video(iPod 5thgeneration)iPod nanoiPod nano2nd generationiPod nano3rd generationiPod nano4th generationiPod touchiPod touch2nd generation

SoftwareVer. 1.0 or more

Ver. 1.2 or more

Ver. 1.2 or moreVer. 1.1.2 or more

Ver. 1.0 or more

Ver. 1.0.2 or more

Ver. 1.1.1 or moreVer. 2.1.1 or more

To Play an iPod


Voice Control System

194

09/07/07 14:21:05 31SVA640_199

Do not connect your iPod using ahub.

Do not keep the iPod in thevehicle. Direct sunlight and highheat will damage it.

Do not use an extension cablebetween the USB adapter cableequipped with your vehicle andyour dock connector.

We recommend backing up yourdata before playing it.

Install the dock connector to theUSB adapter cable securely.

Connect your dock connector tothe iPod correctly and securely.



1. 2.

3.

CONTINUED

Connecting an iPod


Features

195

NOTE:

DOCK CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTERCABLE

CABLE

USB CONNECTOR

09/07/07 14:21:18 31SVA640_200

If the iPod indicator does not appearin the audio display, check theconnections, and try to reconnect theiPod a few times.

If the audio system still does notrecognize the iPod, the iPod mayneed to be reset. Follow theinstructions that came with youriPod, or you can find resetinstructions online at

When the iPod is connected and theaudio display is selected on thescreen by pressing the AUDIObutton, the AUX icon switches to theUSB icon. The display also showsthe current file number and total ofthe selected playable files, the artist,album and track (file) names on thenavigation screen.

On the map screen, you can see theaudio information whenever youtouch the AUDIO INFO icon on thelower part of the screen.

Use the preset buttons while an iPodis playing to select passages andchange files. Each preset button’sfunction is shown on the bottom ofthe screen.

www.apple.com/ipod.


To Change or Select Files

196

AUDIO INFO ICON U.S. model is shown.PRESET BUTTONS

09/07/07 14:21:27 31SVA640_201

－

－

▲ ▼

CONTINUED




You can also select a file directlyfrom a track list on the audio display.Press the AUDIO button to show theaudio display, then touch the TrackList icon. The track list menuappears on the display.




SKIP

FF/REW

Using a Track ListF

eatures

197

AUDIO DISPLAY

TRACK LIST ICON


09/07/07 14:21:37 31SVA640_202

▲ ▼

You can also select a file from theiPod menu: playlists, artists, albumsand songs. Press the AUDIO buttonto display the audio display on thenavigation screen. Touch the iPodMENU icon to display the iPod menu.

Select a desired list by touching theappropriate icon.

The display shows the items on thatlist. Touch a desired file.



To Select a File from iPod Menu

198


iPod MENU ICON

09/07/07 14:21:46 31SVA640_203

－

CONTINUED


If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on either theartists or albums list, all availablefiles on the selected list are played.

Press the AUDIO button to go backto the normal audio playing display.Pressing the CANCEL button goesback to the previous screen, andpressing the MAP button cancels theaudio display on the screen.

You can select any type of repeat andrandom modes with the RPT andRDM buttons. To confirm theselected mode, press the AUDIObutton to show the audio display onthe navigation screen.

This featurecontinuously plays a track/file. Toactivate track repeat, press andrelease the RPT button (preset 1).You will see REPEAT in the display.To turn it off, press and release theRPT button again.


To Select Repeat or Random Mode:

TRACK REPEAT

Features

199


09/07/07 14:21:54 31SVA640_204

－

－

This featureplays all available albums from theselected item in the iPod menu list(playlists, artists, albums or songs)in random order. The tracks/files ineach album are played in therecorded order. To activate albumrandom, press and hold the RDMbutton (preset 2) until you seeALBUM RANDOM on the screen.


You can also select another list fromthe iPod menu while keeping therandom function.

Available operating functions vary onmodels or versions. Some functionsmay not be available on the vehicle’saudio system.

Each time you press and release theRPT button, the mode changesbetween track repeat and normalplay.

Pressing either SKIP button changesthe file while keeping this feature.

This featureplays all available tracks/files fromthe selected items in the iPod menulist (playlists, artists, albums orsongs) in random order. To activatetrack random, press and release theRDM button (preset 2). You will seeTRACK RANDOM on the screen.


ALBUM RANDOM

TRACK RANDOM

200

NOTE:


09/07/07 14:22:03 31SVA640_205

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

To play the radio, press the AM/FMbutton or touch the FM1, FM2, AM,XM1 , or XM2 icon. Touch the CDicon to switch to the disc mode (if adisc is loaded). Each time you pressthe CD/XM button, the audio modeswitches between iPod, disc and XMRadio .


If a PC card is in the audio unit,touch the CARD icon to play the PCcard.

You can disconnect the iPod at anytime when you see the ‘‘OK todisconnect’’ message in the iPoddisplay. Always make sure you seethe ‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message inthe iPod display before youdisconnect it. Make sure to followthe iPod’s instructions on how todisconnect the dock connector fromthe USB adapter cable.

The displayed message mayvary on models or versions. Onsome models, there is nomessage to disconnect.

When you disconnect the iPod whileit is playing, the audio screen (ifselected) shows NO DATA.

If you reconnect the same iPod, thesystem may begin playing where itleft off, depending on what mode theiPod is in when it is reconnected.

If you see an error message in thescreen, see page .

:

202


To Stop Playing Your iPod iPod Error MessagesDisconnecting an iPodF

eatures

201

09/07/07 14:22:14 31SVA640_206

If you see an error message on thescreen while playing an iPod, findthe solution in the chart to the right.If you cannot clear the errormessage, take your vehicle to yourdealer.


Appears when an unsupported iPod is inserted.There is no music information.

iPod Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

202

UNSUPPORTEDNO SONG

09/07/07 14:22:18 31SVA640_207

－

＋

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)

Features

203

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

AUDIO BUTTON

USB ICON

RPT (REPEAT)BUTTON

RDM (RANDOM)BUTTON

FAST FORWARDBUTTON

SKIP BUTTON

SKIP BUTTON

MP3 INDICATOR

SCAN BUTTON

TRACK LISTICON

SOUND ICON

REWIND BUTTON TUNE BAR

JOYSTICK

TUNE BAR


09/07/07 14:22:24 31SVA640_208

＊

＊

This audio system can select andplay the audio files from a USB flashmemory device with the samecontrols used for the in-dash discplayer. To play a USB flash memorydevice, connect it to the USB adaptercable in the console compartment.The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Press the AUDIO button beside thescreen to show the audio display andtouch the AUX icon.

You can also select an icon bymoving the joystick. Move it to left,right, up, or down to change thehighlighting and scroll through lists,then press ENT on the top of thejoystick to set your selection.

The recommended USB flashmemory devices are 256 MB orhigher, and formatted with the FATfile system. Some digital audioplayers may be compatible as well.

The audio system reads and playsthe audio files on the USB flashmemory device in MP3, WMA orAAC formats. Depending on theformat, the display shows MP3,WMA or AAC when a USB flashmemory device is playing. The USBflash memory device limit is up to700 folders or up to 65535 files.

To select the USB mode withoutusing the icon, press the CD/XMbutton repeatedly. The status barappears on the bottom of the screen.

Only AAC format files recordedwith iTunes are playable on thisaudio unit.

Some USB flash memory devices(such as devices with security lock-out features, etc.) will not work inthis audio unit.

:


To Play a USB Flash MemoryDevice

204

09/07/07 14:22:33 31SVA640_209

－

－

－－

－

CONTINUED

Do not use a device such as a cardreader or hard drive as the deviceor your files may be damaged.

Do not connect your USB flashmemory device using a hub.

Do not use an extension cable tothe USB adapter cable equippedwith your vehicle.

Do not keep a USB flash memorydevice in the vehicle. Directsunlight and high heat will damageit.

We recommend backing up yourdata before playing a USB flashmemory device.

Depending on the type andnumber of files, it may take sometime before they begin to play.

Depending on the software thefiles were made with, it may not bepossible to play some files, ordisplay some text data.

Depending on the type ofencoding and writing softwareused, there may be cases wherecharacter information does notdisplay properly.

The order of files in USB playbackmay be different from the order offiles displayed in PC or otherdevices etc. Files are played in theorder stored in USB flash memorydevice.


You can select the AUX mode byusing the navigation system voicecontrol buttons, but cannot operatethe play mode functions.


Bitrate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320/VBR kbps(MPEG1)Supported standards:MPEG1 Audio Layer3MPEG2 Audio Layer3Partition: Top partition onlyMaximum layers: 8



Voice Control SystemF

eatures

205

NOTE:

09/07/07 14:22:51 31SVA640_210

－

－

－

－

－

－－

－

－

－

－－


Bitrate:48 320/VBR kbps (Max 384)

Partition: Top partition onlyMaximum layers: 8

Bitrate:48 320 kbpsSupported standards:MPEG4/AAC LCMPEG2/AAC LCPartition: Top partition onlyMaximum layers: 8


The specifications for compatibleAAC files are:

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz

Supported standards:WMA version 7/8/9

Sampling frequency:8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 kHz

Some versions of MP3, WMA, orAAC format may not be supported. Ifan unsupported file is found, theaudio unit displays UNSUPPORTED,then skips to the next file.

In WMA or AAC format, DRM(digital rights management) filescannot be played. If the system findsa DRM file, the screen displaysUNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skipsto the next file.

1.


Connecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice

206

CABLE

USB CONNECTOR

Combining a low sampling f requencywith a low bitrate may result inextremely degraded sound quality.

09/07/07 14:23:07 31SVA640_211

Connect the USB flash memorydevice to the USB adapter cablecorrectly and securely.

When the USB device is connectedand the audio display is selected onthe screen by pressing the AUDIObutton, the AUX icon switches to theUSB icon. The display also showsthe folder and file numbers, and theelapsed time.

On the map screen, you can see theaudio information whenever youtouch the AUDIO INFO icon on thelower part of the screen.

Use the preset buttons while a USBflash memory device is playing toselect passages and change files.Each preset button’s function isshown on the bottom of the screen.

2.

CONTINUED


To Change or Select FilesF

eatures

207

USB ADAPTER CABLEAUDIO INFO ICON

PRESET BUTTONS


09/07/07 14:23:17 31SVA640_212

－

－

－

▼▲




Toselect a different folder, press eitherside of the TUNE bar. Press the

side to skip to the next folder,and press the side to skip to thebeginning of the previous folder.

You can also select a folder and filefrom the lists shown on the screen.Press the AUDIO button to show theaudio display on the navigationscreen.


SKIP

FF/REW

FOLDER SELECTION To Select a File from Folder and FileLists

208

TRACK LIST ICON


09/07/07 14:23:26 31SVA640_213

▲ ▼

CONTINUED

Touch the Track List icon to switchthe display to the folder list, thenselect and touch a desired folder.

The display changes to the file list.Then, select and touch a desired file.

Touch the folder icon on the upperleft of the screen to move to theparent folder.



Press the AUDIO button to go backto the normal audio playing display.Pressing the CANCEL button goesback to the previous screen, andpressing the MAP button cancels theaudio display on the screen.


Features

209

FOLDER ICON

FOLDER ICON

09/07/07 14:23:35 31SVA640_214

－

－

You can select any type of repeat,random and scan modes with theRPT, RDM and SCAN buttons. Toconfirm the selected mode, press theAUDIO button to show the audiocontrol display on the navigationscreen.

This featurereplays all the tracks/files in theselected folder in the order they arestored. To activate folder repeat,press and hold the RPT button(preset 1) until you see FOLDERREPEAT in the display.

Press and hold the button until youhear a beep to turn off either repeatmode. Pressing either side of theTUNE bar also turns off this feature.

This featurecontinuously plays a track/file. Toactivate track repeat, press andrelease the RPT button (preset 1).You will see TRACK REPEAT in thedisplay.


To Select Repeat, Random or ScanMode:

FOLDER REPEAT

TRACK REPEAT

210


09/07/07 14:23:44 31SVA640_215

－

－

－

－

This featureplays all the tracks/files in randomorder. To activate track random,press and release the RDM button(preset 2). You will see TRACKRANDOM in the display.

Thisfeature plays the tracks/files in theselected folder in random order. Toactivate folder random, press andhold the RDM button (preset 2) untilyou see FOLDER RANDOM in thedisplay.

This featuresamples all tracks/files in theselected folder in the order they arestored. To activate track scan, pressand release the SCAN button. Youwill see TRACK SCAN in the display.You will get a 10 second sampling ofeach track/file in the folder.

This featuresamples the first track/file in eachfolder in the order they are stored.To activate folder scan, press andhold the SCAN button until you seeFOLDER SCAN in the display. Youwill get a 10 second sampling of eachfirst track/file in the folder(s).

Press and hold the button until youhear a beep to turn off either scanmode. Pressing either SKIP buttonalso turns off this feature.



TRACK RANDOM

FOLDER RANDOM

TRACK SCAN

FOLDER-SCAN

Features

211

09/07/07 14:23:50 31SVA640_216

＊＊

＊

＊

To play the radio, press the AM/FMbutton or touch the FM1, FM2, AM,XM1 , or XM2 icon. Press the CDicon to switch to the disc mode (if adisc is loaded). Each time you pressthe CD/XM button, the audio modeswitches between the USB, disc andXM Radio .

If a PC card is in the audio unit,touch the CARD icon to play the PCcard.

You can disconnect the USB flashmemory device at any time even ifthe USB mode is selected on theaudio system. Make sure to followthe USB flash memory device’sinstructions when you remove it.

When you disconnect the USB flashmemory device while it is playing,the audio display (if selected) showsNO DATA.

If you reconnect the same USB flashmemory device, the system willbegin playing where it left off.

If you see an error message in thescreen, see page .

If equipped


:

213


To Stop Playing a USB FlashMemory Device

USB Flash Memory Device ErrorMessages

Disconnecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice

212

09/07/07 14:24:01 31SVA640_217

If you see an error message on thescreen while playing a USB flashmemory device, find the solution inthe chart to the right. If you cannotclear the error message, take yourvehicle to your dealer.


The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the USB flashmemory device. There is a possibility that the files have beendamaged.Appears when an unsupported USB flash memory device is inserted.There is no music information.

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

Features

213

UNPLAYABLE FILE

UNSUPPORTEDNO SONG

09/07/07 14:24:06 31SVA640_218

How well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station’stransmitter, nearby large objects,and atmospheric conditions.

The radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least 10 kHzapart (530, 540, 550). Stations on theFM band are assigned frequencies atleast 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

Radio ReceptionRadio Frequencies

AM/FM Radio Reception

214

09/07/07 14:24:17 31SVA640_219

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.


AM/FM Radio Reception

Features

215

09/07/07 14:24:25 31SVA640_220

Handle a disc by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the disc.These, along with contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tippens, can cause the disc to not playproperly, or possibly jam in the drive.

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,use only high quality discs labeledfor audio use.

When recording a CD-R orCD-RW, the recording must beclosed for it to be used by thesystem.

Play only standard round discs.Odd-shaped discs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

Handle your discs properly toprevent damage and skipping.

When a disc is not being played,store it in its case to protect it fromdust and other contamination. Toprevent warpage, keep discs out ofdirect sunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

A new disc may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on therecording surface of the disc,causing skipping or other problems.Remove these pieces by rubbing theinner and outer edges with the sideof a pencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe system or the magazine.

General Information Protecting Discs

Protecting Your Discs

216


09/07/07 14:24:37 31SVA640_221

The in-dash disc player/changer hasa sophisticated and delicatemechanism. If you insert a damageddisc as indicated in this section, itmay become stuck inside anddamage the audio unit.

Examples of these discs are shownto the right:

Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick discs

Damaged discs Poor quality discs

1.

2. 3.

CONTINUED

Additional Information onRecommended Discs


Features

217

Sealed

Warped BurrsChipped/Cracked

Bubbled/Wrinkled

With Label/Sticker

Using PrinterLabel Kit

With PlasticRing

09/07/07 14:24:51 31SVA640_222

Small, irregular shaped discs Discs with scratches, dirty discs

CD-R or CD-RW may not play dueto the recording conditions.

Scratches and fingerprints on thediscs may cause the sound to skip.

Recommended discs are printedwith the following logo.

Audio unit may not play thefollowing formats.

This audio unit cannot play a Dual-disc .

4. 5.


218

Fingerprints, scratches, etc.

3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape

Arrow ShapeCan Shape

09/07/07 14:25:06 31SVA640_223

▲ ▼

＋

－

＋－

＋

－

＋

－

If equipped

CONTINUED

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button, hold it untilthe desired volume is reached, thenrelease it.

The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,disc (if a disc is loaded), or a PC card(if it is loaded). On models with XMRadio, you can also select XM1 andXM2.

If an iPod or a USB flash memorydevice is plugged into the system,you can also select AUX.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press and release thetop ( ) of the button, the systemgoes to the next preset station on theband you are listening to. Press andrelease the bottom ( ) to go back tothe previous station.

To activate the seek function, pressand hold the top ( ) or bottom ( )of the CH button until you hear abeep. The system searches up ordown from the current frequency to

find a station with a strong signal.

If you are playing a disc, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack (file in MP3 or WMA format)each time you press the top ( ) ofthe CH button. Press the bottom( ) to return to the beginning of thecurrent track or file. Press it twice toreturn to the previous track or file.

You will see the track/file numberand the elapsed time. If the disc hastext data or is compressed in MP3 orWMA, you can also see any otherinformation (track title, file name,folder name, etc.).

If you are playing a PC card, pressthe top ( ) of the CH button toadvance to the next file. Press thebottom ( ) to go back to theprevious file.

Remote Audio Controls

Features

219

CH BUTTON MODE BUTTON

VOL BUTTON

09/07/07 14:25:17 31SVA640_224

＋

－

＋

－

In MP3 or WMA mode, you can usethe seek function to select folders.Press and hold the top ( ) of theCH button until you hear a beep toskip forward to the first file of thenext folder. Press the bottom ( ) toskip backward to the previous folder.

If you are playing a USB flashmemory device or iPod with the USBadapter cable (if equipped), pressand release the top ( ) of the CHbutton to skip forward to thebeginning of the next file. Press thebottom ( ) to skip backward to thebeginning of the current file. Press ittwice to return to the previous file.

When playing a USB flash memorydevice, you can also use the seekfunction to skip the folder. Toactivate this, press and hold eitherside of the CH button until you heara beep.

When a compatible audio unit isconnected to the jack, press the AUXbutton (AUX icon on models withnavigation system) to select it.

The auxiliary input jack isunderneath the accessory powersocket on the front panel. Thesystem will accept auxiliary inputfrom standard audio accessoriesusing a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereominiplug.

If equipped

Remote Audio Controls, Auxiliary Input Jack

Auxiliary Input Jack

220

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

09/07/07 14:25:26 31SVA640_225

Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific code using the presetbuttons (icon on vehicle’s withnavigation system). Because thereare hundreds of numbercombinations possible from specificdigits, making the system workwithout knowing the exact code isnearly impossible.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or theradio fuse is removed, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see ‘‘ENTERCODE’’ in the frequency display thenext time you turn on the system.Use the preset buttons (icons onvehicles with navigation system) toenter the code. The code is on theradio code card included in yourowner’s manual kit. When it isentered correctly, the radio will startplaying.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thesequence, then enter the correctcode. You have 10 tries to enter thecorrect code. If you are unsuccessfulin 10 attempts, you must then leavethe system on for 1 hour beforetrying again.If you lose the card, you must obtain

the code number from a dealer. Todo this, you will need the system’sserial number.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system’s code andserial numbers. It is best to store thiscard in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem’s serial number in this owner’smanual.

The system will retain your AM andFM presets even if power isdisconnected.

On models with audio system

Radio Theft Protection

Features

221

09/07/07 14:25:33 31SVA640_226

Change the hours by pressing the H(preset 1) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time. Changethe minutes by pressing the M(preset 2) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time.

For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:001:52 will reset to 2:00

To set the time, press the CLOCK(AM/FM) button until the displayedtime begins to blink, then release thebutton.

Press the CLOCK (AM/FM) buttonagain to enter the set time.

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, pressing theCLOCK (AM/FM) button until youhear a beep, then pressing the R(preset 3) button sets the clock backto the previous hour. If the displayedtime is after the half hour, the clocksets forward to the beginning of thenext hour.

The navigation system receivessignals from the global positioningsystem (GPS), and the displayedtime is updated automatically by theGPS. Refer to the navigation systemmanual for how to adjust the time.

On models with navigation system

On models without navigation system

Setting the Clock

222

CLOCK BUTTON

H (HOUR)BUTTON

M (MINUTE)BUTTON

R (RESET)BUTTON

H (HOUR)BUTTON

R (RESET)BUTTON

M (MINUTE)BUTTON

U.S. LX, and Canadian DX, DX-Gand LX models

CLOCK BUTTON


09/07/07 14:25:43 31SVA640_227

Once the security system is set,opening either door without usingthe key or the remote transmitter,the hood, or the trunk will cause thealarm to activate. It will also activateif the audio unit is removed from thedashboard or the wiring is cut.

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights, and taillights flashes ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle or remove the radio. Thisalarm continues for 2 minutes, thenthe system resets. To reset anactivated system before the 2minutes have elapsed, unlock thedriver’s door with the key or theremote transmitter.

The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and trunk. For thesystem to activate, you must lock thedoors from the outside with the key,lock tab, door lock switch, or remotetransmitter. The security systemindicator on the instrument panelstarts blinking immediately to showyou the system is setting itself.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, trunk, or either door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and check theindicators on the instrument panel.Close either door or the trunkindicated on the display. Check thehood visually since it is not part ofthe display, and shut it if necessary.

With the system set, you can stillopen the trunk with the master key(U.S. LX model) or the remotetransmitter (U.S. EX, EX-L and Simodels) without triggering the alarm.

The alarm will sound if the trunklock is forced, or the trunk is openedwith the trunk release handle or theemergency trunk opener.

Use the remote transmitterto quickly check that the hood, thetrunk, and both doors are closed.Push the lock button twice within 5seconds. There should be an audibleconfirmation beep.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

If equipped

Security System

Features

223

NOTE:


09/07/07 14:25:53 31SVA640_228

If equipped

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel. The CRUISEMAIN indicator on the instrumentpanel comes on.

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your vehicle speedincreases going down a hill, use thebrakes to slow down. This will cancelthe cruise control. To resume the setspeed, press the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatoron the instrument panel will comeback on.

Press and release the SET/DECEL button on the steeringwheel. The CRUISE CONTROLindicator on the instrument panelcomes on to show the system isnow activated.

The cruise control system can beleft on, even when it is not in use.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

1.

2.

3.Using Cruise Control

Cruise Control

224

CANCEL BUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON RES/ACCEL

SET/DECELImproper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

09/07/07 14:26:04 31SVA640_229

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

To increase the speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, your vehicle speeds up about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal causes the cruisecontrol to cancel.Push on the accelerator pedal until

you reach the desired cruisingspeed, then press the SET/DECEL button.

If you need to decrease yourspeed quickly, use the brakes as younormally would.

Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator onthe instrument panel goes out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the SET/DECEL button.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/DECELbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle will slow down about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Press and hold the SET/DECELbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise Control

Features

225

NOTE:

09/07/07 14:26:16 31SVA640_230

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, thesystem remembers the previouslyset cruising speed. To return to thatspeed, accelerate to above 25 mph(40 km/h) and then press andrelease the RES/ACCEL button. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator comeson, and the vehicle accelerates to thesame cruising speed as before.

Pressing the CRUISE button turnsthe system off and erases theprevious cruising speed.

Canceling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed

Cruise Control

226

09/07/07 14:26:25 31SVA640_231

－

－

Bluetooth

handsfreelink.honda.com

www.honda.ca,

On models with navigation systemHandsFreeLink (HFL)

allows you to place and receivephone calls using voice commands,without handling your cell phone.

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list ofcompatible phones, pairingprocedures, and special featurecapabilities:

In the U.S., visitor call (888) 528-7876.

In Canada, visit or call(888) 9-HONDA-9.

Press andrelease to give a command or answera call.

Press andrelease to end a call, go back to theprevious command, or cancel thecommand.

Air or wind noise from thedashboard and side vents,windows and moonroof mayinterfere with the microphone.Adjust or close them as necessary.

CONTINUED

Using HFL

HFL Talk button

HFL Back button

HFL ButtonsVoice Control Tips

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

Features

227

NAVI VOICECONTROLBUTTONS

HFL BACKBUTTON

HFL TALKBUTTON

MICROPHONE

09/07/07 14:26:37 31SVA640_232

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton each time you want tomake a command. After the beep,speak in a clear, natural tone.

Try to reduce all backgroundnoise. If the microphone picks upvoices other than yours,commands may be misinterpreted.

Many commands can be spokentogether. For example, you cansay ‘‘Call 123-456-7890’’ or ‘‘DialPeter.’’

When HFL is in use, navigationvoice commands cannot berecognized.

To change the volume level ofHFL, use the audio system volumeknob or the steering wheel volumecontrols.

To hear general HFL information,including help on pairing a phoneor setting up the system, say‘‘Tutorial.’’

For help at any time, including alist of available commands, say‘‘Hands free help.’’

Help Features


228

09/07/07 14:26:46 31SVA640_233

On the map screen, you will see a‘‘HFL’’ message on the screen.

A notification that there is anincoming call, or HFL is in use, willappear on the navigation screenwhen the audio system is on.

‘‘ ’’ indicator will be displayed onthe audio display when a phone islinked.

However, when the current street isshown, and AUDIO INFO icon isvisible, ‘‘HFL’’ will not appear whenthere is an incoming call.

Information Display


Features

229

HFL MESSAGE

BLUETOOTH INDICATOR

09/07/07 14:26:55 31SVA640_234

＃＃＃＃

How to Use HFL


230

‘‘Phone Setup’’

‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial’’

‘‘Pair’’

‘‘Edit’’

‘‘Delete’’

‘‘Jim Smith’’

‘‘Set PairingCode’’

The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

‘‘List’’

‘‘Status’’

‘‘Next Phone’’

‘‘123-555- ’’

Press HFLTalk button

Press and release the HFL Talk button each time you give a command.

Pair a phone to the system (See page 233)

Edit the name of a paired phone (See page 234)

Delete a paired phone from the system (See page 234)

Hear a list of all phones paired to the system (See page 234)

Hear which paired phone is currently linked to the system(See page 235)

Search for another previously paired phone to link to (See page 235)

Set the pairing code to a ‘‘Fixed’’ or ‘‘Random’’ number(See page 235)

Enter desired phone number (See page 236)

Once a phonebook entry is stored, you can say a name here.(See page 236)

09/07/07 14:27:05 31SVA640_235

CONTINUED


Features

231

‘‘Redial’’

‘‘Transfer’’

‘‘Mute’’

‘‘Send’’

‘‘Phonebook’’

‘‘Store’’

‘‘Edit’’

‘‘Delete’’

‘‘ReceiveContact’’

‘‘List’’



Redial the last number called (See page 237)

Transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL (See page 239)

Mute your voice to the person at the other end of the call (See page 240)

Send numbers or names during a call (See page 240)

Store a phonebook entry (See page 241)

Edit the number of an existing phonebook entry (See page 241)

Delete a phonebook entry (See page 242)

If your phone supports this function, use this to transfer contacts fromyour phone to HFL (See page 242)

Hear a list of all stored phonebook entries (See page 242)

09/07/07 14:27:13 31SVA640_236

＊

＊


232

‘‘Change Language’’

‘‘Hands Free Help’’

‘‘SystemSet up’’

‘‘Tutorial’’

‘‘Clear’’

‘‘Auto Transfer’’

‘‘Call Notification’’

‘‘Security’’

‘‘Change Passcode’’



: Canadian models

Apply a security passcode to the system that must be input at each keycycle to access the system (See page 247)

Change your security passcode (See page 248)

Set how you would like to be notified of an incoming call(See page 248)

Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when youenter the vehicle (See page 248)

Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries and securitypasscode (See page 249)

Change language from English to French (See page 249)

Hear a tutorial for general rules on using the system (See page 228)

Hear a list of available commands and additional information describing each command(See page 228)

09/07/07 14:27:20 31SVA640_237

To use HFL, you need to pair yourBluetooth-compatible cell phone tothe system.

This command group is available forpaired cell phones.

You cannot pair your phone whilethe vehicle is moving.

Your phone must be in discoveryor search mode to pair. Refer toyour phone’s manual.

Up to six phones can be paired.

Your phone’s battery may drainfaster when it is paired to HFL.

If after three minutes your phoneis not ready to pair or a phone isnot found, the system will time outand return to idle.

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton. If you are pairing a phonefor the first time, HFL will giveyou information about the pairingprocess. If it is not the first phoneyou are pairing, say ‘‘

’’ and say ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts and putyour phone in discovery or searchmode. HFL will give you a 4-digitpairing code and begin searchingfor your phone.

When your phone finds aBluetooth device, select HFL fromthe options and enter the 4-digitcode from the previous step.

Follow the HFL prompts andname the newly paired phone.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Phone Setup

Phonesetup Pair

Phone pairing tips

To pair a cell phone:


Features

233

09/07/07 14:27:34 31SVA640_238

Say ‘‘ .’’

Say ‘‘ ’’ after the prompts.

If there is more than one phonepaired to the system, HFL will askyou which phone’s name you wantto change. Follow the HFLprompts and rename the phone.

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton before a command.


Say ‘‘ .’’


HFL will ask you which phone youwant to delete. Follow the HFLprompts to continue with thedeletion.


HFL will read out all the pairedphone’s names.


Say ‘‘ .’’1.

2.

3. 3.

1.

2.1.

2.

3.

Phone setup

Edit

Phone setup

DeleteList

Phone setup

To hear the names of all pairedphones:

To rename a paired phone: To delete a paired phone:


234

09/07/07 14:27:48 31SVA640_239


Say ‘‘ .’’


HFL will tell you which phone islinked to the system.


Say ‘‘ .’’Say ‘‘ .’’


Say ‘‘ ’’ after theprompts.

HFL disconnects the linked phoneand searches for another pairedphone.

Once another phone is found, it islinked to the system. HFL willinform you which phone is nowlinked.

If no other phones are found orpaired, HFL will inform you that theoriginal phone is linked again.


If you want HFL to create arandom code each time you pair aphone, say ‘‘ .’’ If you wantto choose your own 4-digit code tobe used each time, say ‘‘ ’’and follow the HFL prompts.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

To hear which paired phone iscurrently linked:

To change from the currently linkedphone to another paired phone:

To change the pairing code setting:

Phone setup

Status

Phone setupPhone setup

Next phoneSet pairing code

Random

Fixed


Features

235

09/07/07 14:28:03 31SVA640_240

You can make calls using any phonenumber or a name in the HFLphonebook. You can also redial thelast number called.


Say ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts and saythe phone number you want to dial.

Follow the HFL prompts toconfirm the number and say‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’

Once connected, you will hear theperson you called through the audiospeakers.


Follow the HFL prompts toconfirm the name and make thecall.

Follow the HFL prompts and saythe name stored in the HFLphonebook that you want to call.

Say ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’Bluetooth is the wireless technologythat links your phone to HFL. HFLuses a Class 2 Bluetooth, whichmeans the maximum range betweenyour phone and vehicle is 30 feet (10meters).

During a call, HFL allows you to talkup to 30 minutes after you removethe key from the ignition switch.However, this may weaken thevehicle’s battery.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

Making a Call

Call Dial

Call Dial

Call Dial

To make a call using a phonenumber:

To make a call using a name in theHFL phonebook:


236

09/07/07 14:28:17 31SVA640_241

Select a phonebook you want tochoose a phone number from.

If the phonebook you select is PIN-protected, you will need to enter thePIN to access it. See page formore information.

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton and say ‘‘ .’’

Press the INFO button, then select‘‘ .’’

Select ‘‘.’’

1.

2.

3.

245

CONTINUED

To redial the last number called byHFL:

To make a call from an importedphonebook:

Redial

Cellular Phonebook

Search ImportedPhonebook


Features

237

09/07/07 14:28:27 31SVA640_242

Select the name. All the phonenumbers stored for that name willbe listed.

To search for a specific name in thephonebook, enter the keyword foreither the first or last name.

To display all names in thephonebook, select the ‘‘ ’’ option.

Select the desired number to callfrom the list.

Selecting ‘‘,’’ the phone

number will be stored in HFL, sothat you can call it using HFL’s nametag by voice.

4.

5.List

Store inHandsFreeLink


238

List ICON

09/07/07 14:28:37 31SVA640_243

When you receive a call, an incomingcall notification (if activated) willplay and interrupt the audio systemif it is on.

Press the HFL Talk button to answerthe call, or the HFL Back button tohang up.

If your phone has Call Waiting, pressand release the HFL Talk button toput the original call on hold andanswer the incoming call.

To return to the original call, pressthe HFL Talk button again. If youdon’t want to answer the incomingcall, disregard it and continue withyour original call. If you want to hangup the original call and answer thenew call, press the HFL Back button.

Press and release the HFL Talkbutton and say ‘‘ .’’

You can transfer a call from HFL toyour phone, or from your phone toHFL.

Receiving a Call Transferring a Call

Transfer

Call Waiting


Features

239

09/07/07 14:28:47 31SVA640_244

＃

You can mute your voice to theperson you are talking to during acall.

To mute your voice during a call,press and release the HFL Talkbutton and say ‘‘ .’’

To unmute your voice, press andrelease the HFL Talk button and say‘‘ ’’ again.

HFL allows you to send numbers ornames during a call. This is usefulwhen you call a menu-driven phonesystem.


Say ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts and saythe name or number you want tosend.

Follow the HFL prompts to sendthe tones and continue the call.

To send a pound ( ), say‘‘pound.’’ To send a star (*), say ‘‘star.’’

You can store up to 50 names withtheir associated numbers in HFL.The numbers you store cannot onlybe phone numbers but other types,such as account numbers orpasswords, which can be sent duringa menu-driven call.

1.

2.

3.

Muting a Call

Mute

Mute

Send Numbers or Names Duringa Call

Send

Phonebook

To send a name or number during acall:


240

NOTE:

09/07/07 14:28:58 31SVA640_245

Avoid using duplicate nameentries.

Avoid using ‘‘home’’ as a nameentry.

It is easier for HFL to recognize amultisyllabic or longer name. Forexample, use ‘‘Peter’’ instead of‘‘Pete,’’ or ‘‘John Smith’’ instead of‘‘John.’’


Say ‘‘ .’’


Follow the HFL prompts and saythe name entry you want to edit.

When asked, say the new numberfor that name.

Follow the HFL prompts tocomplete the edit.


Say ‘‘ .’’


Say a name you want to list as yourphonebook entry.

Say the number you want to storefor the name entry.

Follow the HFL prompts and say‘‘ ’’ to store the entry.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

CONTINUED

Phonebook

Edit

Phonebook

Store

Enter

To edit the number stored in a name:To store a phonebook entry:


Features

241

NOTE:

09/07/07 14:29:14 31SVA640_246



Say ‘‘ .’’


Say the name you want to deleteand follow the HFL prompts tocomplete the deletion.

Say ‘‘ .’’


HFL begins reading the names inthe order they were stored.

If you hear a name you want to call,immediately press the HFL Talkbutton and say ‘‘ .’’


Follow the HFL prompts, select anumber from your cell phone, andsend it to HFL.


Say ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts andname the number, or say‘‘ ’’ if it is not the numberyou want to store.

Follow the HFL prompts if youwant to store another number.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

5.

Phonebook

Delete

Phonebook

List

Call

Receive contact

Phonebook

Discard

To delete a name: To list all names in the phonebook: To store a specific phone numberfrom your cell phone directly to theHFL phonebook (available on somephones):


242

09/07/07 14:29:29 31SVA640_247

(available on some phones)

handsfreelink.honda.com

www.honda.ca,

The entire phonebook data of thecell phone that is linked to HFL canbe imported to the navigation system.

Select ‘‘,’’ and HFL will begin

importing the phonebook. Select‘‘ ’’ after the import is completed.

Once a phonebook has beenimported, you can search the phonenumbers by the person’s name.

Select ‘‘,’’ and a list of imported

phonebooks will be displayed.

Select a phonebook from the list.

If you selectfrom the Information screen menu,you will see four HFL options.

For a list of cell phones that arecompatible with this feature:

In the U.S., visitor call (888) 528-7876.

In Canada, visit or call(888) 9-HONDA-9.

CONTINUED

Cellular Phonebook

Import CellularPhonebook

OK

Search ImportedPhonebook

Cellular Phonebook

Import Cellular Phonebook: Search Imported Phonebook:


Features

243

IMPORTED DATE

PIN ICONIMPORTED PHONEBOOK

09/07/07 14:29:44 31SVA640_248

Select a person from the list. Up tothree category icons are displayed inthe left side of the list:

Select the person’s number you wantto call, and press the HFL Talkbutton.

These indicate how many numbersare stored for the name. If a namehas more than three category icons,‘‘…’’ is displayed.

If the phonebook is PIN-protected,you will need to enter the 4-digit PIN.

To search for a specific name in thephonebook, enter the keyword foreither the first or last name.

To display all names in thephonebook, select the ‘‘ ’’ option.List


244

Preference

Home

Mobile

Work

Pager

Fax

Car

Voice

Other

List ICON

09/07/07 14:29:58 31SVA640_249

Select ‘‘,’’ and a list of imported

phonebooks will be displayed.

After making a selection, thefollowing screen will appear.

Select ‘‘ ,’’ then ‘‘ ’’ to completethe deletion.

You can add, change, or remove aPIN number from any phonebook.

You can delete any importedphonebook.

Select a phonebook you want todelete. If the phonebook is PIN-protected, you will need to enter the4-digit PIN number.

If you have selected a phonebookwithout a PIN, you will see the abovedisplay.

Enter the new 4-digit PIN. You willhave to re-enter the PIN forconfirmation.

CONTINUED

Delete ImportedPhonebook

Yes OK

PIN NumberDelete Imported Phonebook:

To add a PIN:


Features

245

09/07/07 14:30:10 31SVA640_250

Select ‘‘ ,’’ then select‘‘ ’’ after you enterthe current PIN.

Enter the new 4-digit PIN number.You will be asked to re-enter the PINfor verification.

The display will change as shownabove.

Select the phonebook you want. Thedisplay will change as shown above.

Enter the current PIN for thisphonebook.

To remove a PIN:To change the PIN to a new number:PIN number

Do not use PIN


246

09/07/07 14:30:18 31SVA640_251

This command group allows you tochange or customize HFL basicsettings.


Say ‘‘ .’’

Once a passcode is set, youwill need to enter it to use HFL eachtime you start the vehicle. If youforget the code, your dealer will haveto reset it for you, or you will have toclear the entire system (see page

).

Follow the HFL prompts and saythe 4-digit passcode you want toset.

Say ‘‘ ’’after the prompts.

Follow the HFL prompts toconfirm the number.

1.

2.

3.

4.

249

CONTINUED

System Setup

System setup

Security

To set a 4-digit passcode to lock theHFL system for security purposes:


Features

247

NOTE:

09/07/07 14:30:27 31SVA640_252

＊

＊

If you get into the vehicle while youare on the phone, the call can beautomatically transferred to HFLwith the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position.


Say ‘‘ .’’


Say ‘‘ .’’Press and release the HFL Talkbutton before a command.

Say ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts toconfirm the number.

Follow the HFL prompts and saythe new 4-digit passcode.


The default setting is a ring tone.

Follow the HFL prompts and say‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ .’’ Youcan also say ‘‘ ’’ for no audibleincoming call notification.


HFL will let you know if autotransfer is on or off, depending onthe previous setting. Follow theHFL prompts to change thesetting.


2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3. 1.

:

System setup

System setup

System setupChange passcode

Ring tone PromptOff

Call notif ication

Auto transfer

To change your security passcode: To select either a ring tone or aprompt as the incoming callnotif ication :

To activate or deactivate the autotransfer function:


248

09/07/07 14:30:41 31SVA640_253

This operation clears the passcodes,paired phones, all names in the HFLphonebook, and all importedphonebook data.


Say ‘‘ .’’


Follow the HFL prompts tocontinue to complete the clearingprocedure.

You can also clear the system whenyou have forgotten the passcode andcannot access HFL. When HFL asksyou for the passcode, say ‘‘

.’’ Paired phones, all names inthe HFL phonebook and all importedphonebook data will be lost.


Follow the HFL prompts.

Say the language you want tochange to in that language.


Say ‘‘ .’’

Follow the HFL prompts tochange the language to English orFrench.

If you have not named your pairedphone in the language you justselected, HFL will ask you to name itin the current language.

When French is your currentlyselected language, you can give voicecommands in French.

1.

2.

3.

2.

1.1.

2.

CONTINUED

Canadian models only Canadian models only

System setup

Clear

Systemclear

Quick Language Selection Change Language

Change language

To clear the system:

To quickly change the language: To change the system languagebetween English and French:


Features

249

09/07/07 14:30:58 31SVA640_254

The name and logos areregistered trademarks owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use ofsuch marks by Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. is under license. Othertrademarks and trade names arethose of their respective owners.

BluetoothAs required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.



Bluetooth Wireless Technology


250

09/07/07 14:31:04 31SVA640_255

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

.............................Break-in Period . 252.................Fuel Recommendation . 252

.........Service Station Procedures . 253....................................Refueling . 253

Opening and Closing................................the Hood . 254

...................................Oil Check . 255.............Engine Coolant Check . 257

...............................Fuel Economy . 258...Accessories and Modifications . 261

.............................Carrying Cargo . 263

Before Driving

Before

Driving

251

09/07/07 14:31:08 31SVA640_256

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 87 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy, metallic rappingnoise that can lead to engine damage.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon premium unleaded gasoline with apump octane number of 91 or higher.Use of a lower octane gasoline cancause occasional metallic knockingnoises in the engine and will result indecreased engine performance. Useof a gasoline with a pump octanenumber less than 87 can lead toengine damage.

Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contactyour authorized dealer for service.

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

We recommend using qualitygasolines containing detergentadditives that help prevent fuelsystem and engine deposits.

You may hear a knocking noise fromthe engine if you drive the vehicle atlow engine speed (below about 1,000rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this,raise the engine speed by shifting toa lower gear.

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

All models except Si

Si model only

252

09/07/07 14:31:21 31SVA640_257

CONTINUED

Park with the driver’s side closestto the service station pump.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10% ethanol byvolume and up to 15% MTBE byvolume. Do not use gasolinecontaining methanol.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

Open the fuel fill door by pushingon the handle to the left of thedriver’s seat.

For further important fuel-relatedinformation for your vehicle, orinformation on gasoline that does notcontain MMT, visit Owner Link at

. In Canada, visitfor additional

information on gasoline.

1.

2.owners.honda.comwww.honda.ca

Service Station Procedures

RefuelingB

eforeD

riving

253

Push

TETHER

FUEL FILL CAP

HOLDER

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

09/07/07 14:31:31 31SVA640_258

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle under the lower leftcorner of the dashboard. Thehood will pop up slightly.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least once. If youdo not properly tighten the cap,the malfunction indicator lampmay come on (see page ). Youwill also see a ‘‘CHECK FUELCAP’’ message on the informationdisplay.

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank equalizes.The fuel fill cap is attached to thefuel filler with a tether. Place thecap in the holder on the fuel filldoor.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Thisleaves some room in the fuel tankfor the fuel to expand withtemperature changes.

even though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle’s fuel vapor recoverysystem. The system helps keepfuel vapor from going into theatmosphere. Try filling at anotherpump. If this does not fix theproblem, consult your dealer.

1.

5.

6.4.

3.

350

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off


Opening and Closing the Hood

254

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

09/07/07 14:31:41 31SVA640_259

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood near the center.Slide your hand to the left untilyou feel the hood latch handle.Push this handle up to release it.Lift up the hood.

If the hood latch handle movesstiffly, or if you can open the hoodwithout lifting the handle, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated.

To close the hood, lift it up slightlyto remove the support rod fromthe hole. Put the support rod backinto its holding clip. Lower thehood to about a foot (30 cm) abovethe fender, then let it drop. Makesure it is securely latched.

Remove the dipstick (orangehandle).

Wipe off the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto its hole.

Holding the grip, pull the supportrod out of its clip. Insert the endinto the hole in the hooddesignated by an arrow.

3.

1.

2.

3.2.

CONTINUED


Oil CheckB

eforeD

riving

255

DIPSTICK

LATCH

SUPPORT ROD DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX, EX-LCLIP

GRIP

09/07/07 14:31:54 31SVA640_260

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

4.300


Adding Engine Oil

256

SiSi

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX, EX-L

LOWER MARKUPPER MARK

DIPSTICK

09/07/07 14:32:01 31SVA640_261

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

304

296

AddingEngine Coolant

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks

Engine Coolant Check


Before

Driving

257

RESERVE TANK

Si

RESERVE TANKMAX

MIN

MAX

MIN


09/07/07 14:32:08 31SVA640_262

－－

－－

Fuel economy is not a fixed number.It varies based on driving conditions,driving habits and vehicle condition.Therefore, it is not possible for oneset of estimates to predict fueleconomy precisely for all drivers inall environments.

Represents urbandriving in light traffic. A range ofmiles per gallon achieved is alsoprovided.

The EPA fuel economy estimatesshown in the example to the rightare a useful tool for comparisonwhen buying a vehicle. EPAestimates include:

Represents a combination of city andhighway driving. The scalerepresents the range of combinedfuel economy for other vehicles inthe class.

Represents amixture of rural and interstatedriving, in a warmed-up vehicle,typical of longer trips in free-flowingtraffic. A range of miles per gallon

achieved is also provided.

Provides an estimated annual fuelcost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000km) per year multiplied by the cost

per gallon (based on EPA fuel costdata) divided by the combined fueleconomy.

For more information on fueleconomy ratings and factors thataffect fuel economy, visit

(Canada: Visit)

www.fueleconomy.gov www.vehicles.gc.ca

Fuel Economy

Actual Mileage and EPA FuelEconomy Estimates Comparison.

City MPGCombined Fuel Economy

Highway MPGEstimated Annual Fuel Cost

258

Combined FuelEconomy

(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)

Estimated AnnualFuel Cost

City MPG Highway MPG

09/07/07 14:32:19 31SVA640_263

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Aggressive driving (hardacceleration and braking)Excessive idling, accelerating andbraking in stop-and-go trafficCold engine operation (enginesare more efficient when warmedup)Driving with a heavy load or theair conditioner runningImproperly inflated tires

The following factors can lower yourvehicle’s fuel economy:

A properly maintained vehiclemaximizes fuel economy. Poormaintenance can significantly reducefuel economy. Always maintain yourvehicle according to the maintenancemessages displayed on theinformation display (see

on page ).For example:

Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking increase fuelconsumption.

Aerodynamic drag has a big effecton fuel economy at speeds above45 mph (75 km/h). Reduce yourspeed and you reduce the drag.Trailers, car top carriers, roofracks and bike racks are also bigcontributors to increased drag.

If your vehicle has amanual transmission, you canboost your fuel economy by upshifting as early as possible.

Idlingresults in 0 miles per gallon (0 kmsper liter).

An underinflated tire increases‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reducesfuel economy.

It puts a heavierload on the engine, increasing fuelconsumption.

Inparticular, a build-up of snow ormud on your vehicle’s undersideadds weight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fueleconomy.

296CONTINUED

Fuel Economy

Fuel Economy Factors Use the recommended viscositymotor oil, displaying the APICertif ication Seal (see page

).

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Drive moderately

Observe the speed limit

Always drive in the highest gearpossible

Avoid excessive idling

Maintain proper tire inflation

Avoid carrying excess weight inyour vehicle

Keep your vehicle clean

300

Vehicle Maintenance

Drive EfficientlyB

eforeD

riving

259

09/07/07 14:32:34 31SVA640_264

－

－

Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.Reset trip counter to zero.Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.Follow one of the simple calculations above.

The A/Cputs an extra load on the enginewhich makes it use more fuel. Usethe fresh-air ventilation whenpossible.

Combine several short trips intoone. A warmed-up engine is morefuel efficient than a cold one.

Direct calculation is therecommended source of informationabout your actual fuel economy.Using frequency of fill-ups or takingfuel gauge readings are NOTaccurate measures of fuel economy.Fuel economy may improve over thefirst several thousand miles(kilometers).

1)2)3)4)

Fuel Economy

Checking Your Fuel Economy

Measuring Techniques

Minimize the use of the airconditioning system

Plan and combine trips

Calculating Fuel Economy

260

Miles drivenGallons of

fuelMiles per

Gallon

100 Kilometers L per 100 kmLiter

09/07/07 14:32:45 31SVA640_265

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake your vehicle unsafe. Beforeyou make any modifications or addany accessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.

Your dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle, or improve its performance.These accessories have beendesigned and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Although non-Honda accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags, anti-lock brakes, andtire pressure monitoring system (ifequipped).

Before installing any accessory:

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withthe proper operation of yourvehicle.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows. Accessories installed inthese areas may interfere withproper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

352

Accessories and Modifications

Accessories

Before

Driving

261

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

09/07/07 14:32:56 31SVA640_266

＊

＊

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components withnon-Honda components couldseriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Some examples are:

Raising your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

Non-Honda wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents and will not becompatible with the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS) .

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety features can make thesystems ineffective.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Lowering the vehicle with a non-Honda suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

If equipped:

Modifying Your Vehicle

Accessories and Modifications

262

09/07/07 14:33:06 31SVA640_267

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

Glove boxDoor pockets

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Trunk, including the rear seatswhen folded down

Center pocketConsole compartmentSeat-back pocket

Carrying Cargo

Before

Driving

263

TRUNK

GLOVE BOX

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT DOOR POCKET

SEAT-BACK POCKET

: If equipped

CENTER POCKET

09/07/07 14:33:17 31SVA640_268

－

－ ×

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit

Locate the statement ‘‘Thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’splacard.

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amountequals 1,400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb. passengers in yourvehicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs.(1,400 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)

Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

The maximum load for your vehicleis 850 lbs (385 kg) for U.S. modelsand 395 kg for Canadian models.

This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, andaccessories, and the tongue load ifyou are towing a trailer.

Label Example

See Tire And Loading Informationlabel attached to the driver’sdoorjamb.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

Load Limits

Carrying Cargo

264

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

09/07/07 14:33:32 31SVA640_269

In addition, the total weight of thevehicle, all occupants, accessories,cargo, and trailer tongue load mustnot exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). Bothare on a label on the driver’sdoorjamb.

Example 1

Example 2

Example 3

Carrying Cargo

Before

Driving

265

Max Load (850 lbs) Cargo Weight(550 lbs)

Max Load (850 lbs)

Max Load (850 lbs)

Cargo Weight(250 lbs)

Cargo Weight(100 lbs)

Passenger Weight(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs)



09/07/07 14:33:38 31SVA640_270

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Do not put any items on top of therear shelf. They can block yourview and be thrown around thevehicle during a crash.

The cargo net can be used to helphold down items stored in the trunk.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver’s ability to operate thepedals, the operation of the seats,or the operation of the sensorsunder the seats.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing the trunklid, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page .

If you fold down the back seat, tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the trunk, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

Keep all cargo below the bottomof the windows. If it is higher, itcould interfere with the properoperation of the side curtainairbags.

50

Optional

Carrying Cargo

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Cargo Net

carbon monoxidepoisoning

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk

266

09/07/07 14:33:51 31SVA640_271

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate themanual and automatic transmissions.It also includes importantinformation on parking your vehicle,the braking system, the vehiclestability assist (VSA ) system, andthe tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS).

.......................Driving Guidelines . 268........................Preparing to Drive . 269.......................Starting the Engine . 270

...................Manual Transmission . 271..............Automatic Transmission . 274

...........................................Parking . 278.............................Braking System . 279

...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 280Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ),

aka Electronic Stability........Control (ESC), System . 282

Tire Pressure Monitoring System......................................(TPMS) . 284

...........................Towing a Trailer . 287

Driving

Driving

267

09/07/07 14:33:56 31SVA640_272

Because of the low-profile tiresfitted to your vehicle, the alloywheels are closer to the ground.Driving over a pothole or roaddebris at too high a speed canseriously damage a wheel. Slowdown under these conditions.

Curbs and steep inclines coulddamage the front and rearbumpers. Low curbs that do notaffect the average vehicle may behigh enough to hit the bumper onyour vehicle. The front or rearbumper may scrape when trying todrive onto an incline, such as asteep driveway or trailer ramps.

Use caution if you ever drive yourvehicle on very rough or ruttedroads. You could damage thesuspension and underbody bybottoming out. Going too fast overparking lot ‘‘speed bumps’’ canalso cause damage.

Your vehicle is designed to give youoptimum handling and performanceon well-maintained roads. As part ofthis design, your vehicle has aminimum of ground clearance andvery low-profile tires.

Driving Guidelines

Si model

268

09/07/07 14:34:02 31SVA640_273

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

Make sure the doors are securelyclosed and locked.

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.

Check that the hood is fully closed.

Check that the trunk is fullyclosed.

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel (see page ).

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

1.

2.

14

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

11.

10.

5593

106

76

Preparing to Drive

Driving

269

09/07/07 14:34:16 31SVA640_274

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in the START (III)position for more than 15 secondsat a time. If the engine does notstart right away, pause for at least10 seconds before trying again.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

Press the clutch pedal down all theway. The START (III) positiondoes not function unless the clutchpedal is pressed.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Manual transmission:

Automatic transmission:

Starting the Engine

270

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperlycoded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. Formore inf ormation, see page .

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

78

09/07/07 14:34:27 31SVA640_275

CONTINUED

The manual transmission issynchronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot shift directly from fifth toreverse.

On vehicles with 6-speed manualtransmission, the lockout systemprevents you from shifting directlyfrom any forward gear to reversewhile the vehicle is moving at acertain speed (see page ).

When shifting up or down, makesure you push the clutch pedal downall the way, shift to the next gear,and let the pedal up gradually. Whenyou are not shifting, do not rest yourfoot on the clutch pedal. This can

cause your clutch to wear out faster.

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoreverse with the vehicle moving.Push down the clutch pedal, andpause for a few seconds beforeshifting into reverse, or shift into oneof the forward gears for a moment.This stops the gears so they won’t‘‘grind.’’

273

The engine can be damaged ifyou inadvertently downshift into thewrong gear (for example, going fromthird gear at high rpms to second gearinstead of upshifting to fourth gear; theengine speed limiter will not work in thissituation).

Manual Transmission

Driving

271

NOTE:

SiDX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX, EX-L

09/07/07 14:34:37 31SVA640_276

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure the engine speed will notgo into the tachometer’s red zone inthe lower gear.

Your vehicle is equipped with analuminum shift lever. If you leave thevehicle parked outside for a long

time on a hot day, be careful beforemoving the shift lever. Because ofthe heat, the shift lever may beextremely hot. If the outsidetemperature is low, the shift leverfeels cold.

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you goodfuel economy and effectiveemissions control. The followingshift points are recommended:

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th5th to 6th

Normal acceleration

15 mph (24 km/h)27 mph (44 km/h)39 mph (63 km/h)53 mph (85 km/h)

Normal acceleration

17 mph (27 km/h)29 mph (46 km/h)37 mph (60 km/h)43 mph (69 km/h)49 mph (79 km/h)

On Si model

On models with 6-speed manualtransmission

On models with 5-speed manualtransmission

Recommended Shift Points

Manual Transmission

272

Rapid slowing or speeding upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

09/07/07 14:34:46 31SVA640_277

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

Your vehicle has a rev limit indicatorto show you when the engine speedis near the tachometer’s red zone(see page ).

If you are still unable to shift toreverse, apply the parking brake,and turn the ignition key to theACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)position.

With the clutch pedal still pressed,start the engine.

Press the clutch pedal, and shift toreverse.

If you need to use this procedure toshift to reverse, your vehicle may bedeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.

The manual transmission has alockout so you cannot accidentallyshift from any forward gear toreverse while the vehicle is movingat a certain speed. If you cannot shiftto reverse when the vehicle isstopped, do the following:

With the clutch pedal pressed,move the shift lever to the first/second gear side of the neutralgate, then shift to reverse.

1.

2.

3.

4.

61

On Si model

6-speed manual transmissionEngine Speed Limiter Reverse Lockout

Manual Transmission

Driving

273

Move the shift lever in sequence.

09/07/07 14:34:58 31SVA640_278

These indicators on the instrumentpanel show which position the shiftlever is in.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it flashes while driving (inany shift position), it indicates apossible problem in the transmission.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem with theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration, andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

To shift from Park to any position,press firmly on the brake pedal, andpress the release button on the frontof the shift lever, then move thelever. You cannot shift out of Parkwhen the ignition switch is in theLOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)position.

Automatic Transmission

Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting

274

RELEASEBUTTON

SHIFT LEVER

09/07/07 14:35:07 31SVA640_279

－

－

－

－

CONTINUED

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. You must also press therelease button to shift into Park. Theshift lever must be in Park beforeyou can remove the key from theignition switch.

Press the brakepedal and the release button on thefront of the shift lever to shift fromPark to reverse. To shift fromreverse to neutral, come to acomplete stop, and then shift. Pressthe release button before shiftinginto reverse from neutral.

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Press the releasebutton on the front of the shift leverto move it.

Use neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from neutral toanother gear.

Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear (1 through 5) for yourspeed and acceleration. You maynotice the transmission shifting up athigher engine speeds when theengine is cold. This helps the enginewarm up faster.

277

To shift from:P to R

R to PN to RD to 22 to 11 to 2

2 to DD to DD to ND to DN to DR to N

Do this:Press the brake pedal, andpress the shift lever releasebutton.

Press the shift lever releasebutton.

Move the shift lever.

3

3

3

3


Shift Lock Release

Reverse (R)

Park (P)

Neutral (N)

Drive (D)

Driving

275

09/07/07 14:35:17 31SVA640_280

－

－

－This position is similarto D, except only the first threegears are selected. Use D to provideengine braking when going down asteep hill. D can also keep thetransmission from cycling betweenthird and fourth gears in stop-and-godriving.

To shift to second,press the release button on the frontof the shift lever. This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop.

Use second gear:For more power when climbing.To increase engine braking whengoing down steep hills.For starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow.To help reduce wheel spin.

To shift from second tofirst, press the release button on thefront of the shift lever. This positionlocks the transmission in first gear.By upshifting and downshiftingthrough 1, 2, D , and D, you canoperate the transmission much like amanual transmission without aclutch pedal.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

3

33


Engine Speed LimiterDrive (D )

Second (2)

First (1)3

276

09/07/07 14:35:25 31SVA640_281

Do this if pushing on the brake pedaland pressing the release button doesnot let you shift the transmission outof Park:

Set the parking brake.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

Insert the key in the shift lockrelease slot.

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have itchecked by your dealer.

Remove the key from the shiftlock release slot, then install thecover. Make sure the notch on thecover is on the rear.Return the key to the ignitionswitch, press the brake pedal, andrestart the engine.

Push down on the key while youpress the release button on thefront of the shift lever and movethe shift lever out of Park toneutral.Put a cloth on the edge of the shift

lock release slot cover to preventscratches. Using a small flat-tip

screwdriver or metal fingernail file,carefully pry on the edge of thecover to remove it.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.


Shift Lock ReleaseD

riving

277

COVER

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

RELEASE BUTTON

09/07/07 14:35:37 31SVA640_282

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the vehicle frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

Make sure the moonroof (ifequipped) and the windows areclosed.

Lock the doors.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the trunk or take them with you.

Turn off the lights.

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly, oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

Check the indicator on theinstrument panel to verify that thesecurity system is set.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb. If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, put it in first gear.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb. If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, put it in reverse gear.

On vehicles with security system

Parking Tips

Parking

278

Never install a sunshade between theupper and lower meters on theinstrument panel. If you do, you couldcause heat damage to the upper meteron a very hot day.

09/07/07 14:35:50 31SVA640_283

Your vehicle is equipped with frontdisc brakes. The brakes on the rearwheels may be disc or drum,depending on the model. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The anti-lockbrake system (ABS) helps you retainsteering control when braking veryhard.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious in your driving.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

On vehicles with vehicle stabilityassist (VSA) system, the emergencybrake assist system increases thestopping force when you depress thebrake pedal hard in an emergencysituation.

Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, reduces their effectiveness andreduces brake pad life. In addition,fuel economy can be reduced. It alsokeeps your brake lights on all thetime, confusing drivers behind you.

Braking System

Braking System Design

Brake Pad Wear Indicators

Driving

279

09/07/07 14:36:01 31SVA640_284

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the wheels fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

If this indicator comes on, the anti-lock function of the braking systemhas shut down. The brakes still worklike a conventional system, butwithout anti-lock. You should haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

If the indicator comes on whiledriving, test the brakes as instructedon page .

The electronic brake distribution(EBD) system, which is part of theABS, also balances the front-to-rearbraking distribution according tovehicle loading.

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

351You should never pump the brake pedal.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

ABS Indicator

280

09/07/07 14:36:09 31SVA640_285

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock.

It only helps with thesteering control during braking.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the EBD system may alsobe shut down.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

The VSA indicator will come onalong with the ABS indicator.

351

On vehicles with VSA system

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

Important Safety RemindersABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

Driving

281

09/07/07 14:36:19 31SVA640_286

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA Activation indicator blinks.

If this indicator comes on whiledriving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe, and turn off theengine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays on or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned to

the ON (II) position, there may be aproblem with the VSA system. Haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

The main function of theVSA system is generally known asElectronic Stability Control (ESC).The system also includes a tractioncontrol function.

Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

If the low tire pressure indicator orTPMS indicator comes on, the VSAsystem automatically turns on even ifthe VSA system is turned off bypressing the VSA OFF switch (seepage ). If this happens, youcannot turn the VSA system off bypressing the VSA OFF switch again.

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does thisby regulating the engine’s output andby selectively applying the brakes.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times. There may alsobe some noise from the VSAhydraulic system. You will also seethe VSA activation indicator blink.

283

U.S. models

EX-L and Si models

VSA Activation Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

282

NOTE:

09/07/07 14:36:32 31SVA640_287

Immediately after freeing yourvehicle, be sure to switch the VSA onagain. We do not recommend drivingyour vehicle with the VSA andtraction control systems switched off.

In certain unusual conditions whenyour vehicle gets stuck in shallowmud or fresh snow, it may be easierto free it with the VSA temporarilyswitched off. When the VSA systemis off, the traction control system isalso off. You should only attempt tofree your vehicle with the VSA off ifyou are not able to free it when theVSA is on.

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are of the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.This switch is under the driver’s side

vent. To turn the VSA system on andoff, press and hold it until you hear abeep.

When VSA is off, the VSA activationindicator comes on as a reminder.Press and hold the switch again. Itturns the system back on.

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

330

VSA OFF Switch VSA and Tire Sizes

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

Driving

283

09/07/07 14:36:43 31SVA640_288

When the low tire pressure indicatoris on, one or more of your tires issignificantly underinflated. Youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure as indicated onthe vehicle’s tire information placard.

If you think you can safely drive ashort distance to a service station,proceed slowly, and inflate the tire tothe recommended pressure shownon the driver’s doorjamb.

If the tire is flat, or if the tirepressure is too low to continuedriving, replace the tire with thecompact spare tire (see page ).

If you cannot make the low tirepressure indicator go out afterinflating the tires to the specifiedvalues, have your dealer check thesystem as soon as possible.

Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Because tire pressure varies bytemperature and other conditions,the low tire pressure indicator maycome on unexpectedly.

Your vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.

Each tire has its own pressuresensor (not including the spare tire).If the air pressure of a tire becomessignificantly low while driving, thesensor in that tire immediately sendsa signal that causes the low tirepressure indicator to come on.

339

U.S. models only Low Tire PressureIndicator

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

284

09/07/07 14:36:53 31SVA640_289

For example, if you check and fillyour tires in a warm area, then drivein extremely cold weather, the tirepressure will be lower thanmeasured and could be underinflatedand cause the low tire pressureindicator to come on. Or, if youcheck and adjust your tire pressurein cooler conditions, and drive intoextremely hot conditions, the tiremay become overinflated. However,the low tire pressure indicator willnot come on if the tires areoverinflated.

Refer to page for tire inflationguidelines.

When you restart the vehicle withthe compact spare tire, the TPMSindicator may also come on and stayon after driving several miles(kilometers).

Although your tire pressure ismonitored, you must manually checkthe tire pressures monthly.

Each tire, including the spare, shouldbe checked monthly when cold, andset to the recommended inflationpressure as specified on the tire

information label and in the owner’smanual (see page ).

This indicator comes on and stays onif there is a problem with the tirepressure monitoring system.

If this happens, the system will shutoff and no longer monitor tirepressures. Have the system checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.

If the low tire pressure indicator orTPMS indicator comes on, the VSAsystem automatically turns on even ifthe VSA system is turned off bypressing the VSA OFF switch (seepage ). If this happens, youcannot turn the VSA system off bypressing the VSA OFF switch again.

323

325

283

On vehicles with VSA system

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator


Driving

285

09/07/07 14:37:05 31SVA640_290




If you have a flat tire, the low tirepressure indicator will come on.Replace the flat tire with thecompact spare tire (see page ).

Each wheel (except the compactspare tire wheel) is equipped with atire pressure sensor mounted insidethe tire behind the valve stem. Youmust use TPMS specific wheels. It isrecommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by your dealer orqualified technician.

After you replace the flat tire withthe compact spare tire, the low tirepressure indicator stays on. This isnormal; the system is not monitoringthe spare tire pressure. Manuallycheck the spare tire pressure to besure it is correct. After several miles(kilometers) driving with thecompact spare tire, the TPMSindicator comes on and the low tirepressure indicator goes off.

The low tire pressure indicator orthe TPMS indicator will go off, afterseveral miles (kilometers) driving,when you replace the spare tire withthe specified regular tire equippedwith the tire pressure monitor sensor.

Never use a puncture-repairing agentin a flat tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.Have the flat tire repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible.

339

Changing a Tire with TPMS


286

09/07/07 14:37:14 31SVA640_291

Your vehicle is not designed to tow atrailer. Attempting to do so can voidyour warranties.

Your vehicle is not designed to betowed behind a motor home. If yourvehicle needs to be towed in anemergency, see page .358

Towing a Trailer

Towing Your VehicleD

riving

287

09/07/07 14:37:19 31SVA640_292

288

09/07/07 14:37:21 31SVA640_293

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the service manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

This section also includesinstructions on how to read themaintenance minder messages onthe information display, andinstructions for simple maintenancetasks you may want to take care ofyourself.

......................Maintenance Safety . 290....................Maintenance Minder . 291

..............................Fluid Locations . 298........................Adding Engine Oil . 300

.......Recommended Engine Oil . 300..............................Synthetic Oil . 301

................Engine Oil Additives . 301Changing the Engine Oil and

...........................................Filter . 302..............................Engine Coolant . 304

....................Windshield Washers . 307....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 308

........Manual Transmission Fluid . 309................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 310

....................Power Steering Fluid . 311.............................................Lights . 312

................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 319.....................................Floor Mats . 320

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 321.................................Wiper Blades . 321

...............................................Tires . 323...................Checking the Battery . 333

.............................Vehicle Storage . 335

383

Maintenance

Maintenance

289

09/07/07 14:37:27 31SVA640_294

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingwith the battery or compressed air.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system cooldown before touching any parts.

Maintenance Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Injury from moving parts.

Potential Vehicle HazardsCarbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

290

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle, or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

09/07/07 14:37:40 31SVA640_295

－－－－－－－－－－－－－

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

CONTINUED

Calculated EngineOil Life (%)

100 % 91 %90 % 81 %80 % 71 %70 % 61 %60 % 51 %50 % 41 %40 % 31 %30 % 21 %20 % 16 %15 % 11 %10 % 6 %15 % 6 %

5 % 1 %0 %

DisplayedEngine Oil Life (%)

100 %90 %80 %70 %60 %50 %40 %30 %20 %15 %10 %15 %5 %0 %

Your vehicle displays engine oil lifeand maintenance service items onthe information display to show youwhen you should have your dealerperform engine oil replacement andindicated maintenance service.

Based on the engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life and displays it as apercentage.

The remaining engine oil life isdisplayed on the information displayaccording to this table:

To see the current engine oil life,turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, then push and releasethe SEL/RESET button repeatedlyuntil the engine oil life indicatorappears (see page ).65

1 :2 :

DX and Canadian DX-GLX, EX, EX-L, and Si

1

1

2

Maintenance Minder

Engine Oil Life IndicatorM

aintenance

291

MAINTENANCEMINDER INDICATOR

ENGINE OIL LIFEINDICATOR

INFORMATION DISPLAY

09/07/07 14:37:49 31SVA640_296

If the remaining engine oil life is 15to 6 percent, you will see the engineoil life indicator every time you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position. The maintenance minderindicator will also come on, and themaintenance item code(s) for otherscheduled maintenance itemsneeding service will be displayednext to the engine oil life indicator.

When the remaining engine oil life is5 to 1 percent, you will see a‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with thesame maintenance item code(s),every time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

The 15 and 10 percent oil lifeindicators remind you that yourvehicle will soon be due forscheduled maintenance.

Maintenance Minder

292

ENGINE OIL LIFEINDICATOR

MAINTENANCEITEM CODE(S)

SERVICE MESSAGE

09/07/07 14:37:56 31SVA640_297

If you do not perform the indicatedmaintenance, negative distancetraveled is displayed and begins toblink after the vehicle has beendriven 10 miles (10 km) or more.

When the remaining engine oil life is0 percent, the engine oil life indicatorwill blink. The display comes onevery time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Themaintenance minder indicator( ) also comes on and remainson in the instrument panel. Whenyou see this message, immediatelyhave the indicated maintenance doneby your dealer.

The maintenance item code or codesindicate the main and sub itemsrequired at the time of the oil change(see page ).

You can switch the display to theodometer, the trip meter, and theoutside temperature indicator (ifequipped) by pushing the SEL/RESET button on the dashboardrepeatedly.

When the engine oil life is 15 to 1percent, the maintenance minderindicator ( ) comes on everytime you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, then it goes outif you switch the information display.

When you see this message, havethe indicated maintenanceperformed by your dealer as soon aspossible.

Immediately have the indicatedmaintenance done by your dealer.

Negative distance traveled meansyour vehicle has passed themaintenance required point.

297

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

293

NEGATIVE DISTANCE TRAVELED

09/07/07 14:38:07 31SVA640_298

Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the informationdisplay the next time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the maintenance minder asfollows:

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Press the SEL/RESET buttonrepeatedly until the engine oil lifeindicator is displayed.

All maintenance items displayed onthe information display are in code.For an explanation of thesemaintenance codes, see page .

You can change the informationdisplay from the engine oil lifedisplay to the odometer, the tripmeter, or the outside temperature (ifequipped) every time you press andrelease the SEL/RESET button.

When the engine oil life is 0 percentor negative distance traveled, themaintenance minder indicator( ) remains on even if youchange the information display.

Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as described as follows. 1.

2.297

Maintenance Minder

Resetting the Engine Oil LifeDisplay

Maintenance Main Items and SubItems

294

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM

09/07/07 14:38:19 31SVA640_299

CONTINUED

If you have the required servicedone but do not reset the display, orreset the display without doing theservice, the system will not show thecorrect maintenance intervals. Thiscan lead to serious mechanicalproblems because you will no longerhave an accurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your vehicle best and canprovide competent, efficient service.

Press the SEL/RESET button formore than 5 seconds. Themaintenance item code(s) willdisappear, and the engine oil lifewill reset to ‘‘100.’’

Press the SEL/RESET button forabout 10 seconds. The engine oillife and the maintenance itemcode(s) will blink.

4.3.

Maintenance Minder

Important MaintenancePrecautions

Maintenance

295

09/07/07 14:38:28 31SVA640_300

－

－

－

－

－

－

＃

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.See page .

U.S. Vehicles:

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed in accordance with theintervals indicated by theinformation display.

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Make sure tohave the service facility or personreset the display as previouslydescribed. Keep all receipts as proofof completion, and have the personwho does the work fill out yourHonda Service History or CanadianMaintenance Log. Check yourwarranty booklet for moreinformation.

We recommend using Honda partsand fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same highquality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

255

257

308

310

323

312

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance,replacement, or repair ofemissions control devices andsystems may be done by anyautomotive repair establishmentor individual using parts that are‘‘certif ied’’ to EPA standards.

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

296

09/07/07 14:38:41 31SVA640_301

＊

＊

＃

＃

＊

＃

Maintenance Minder

297

:

If the message ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after thedisplay is reset, change the engine oil every year.

Independent of the maintenance minder indicator in the informationdisplay, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.

Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the centercolumn on page .

NOTE:

:

296

Maintenance Sub ItemsRotate tiresReplace air cleaner element

If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000miles (24,000 km).

Replace dust and pollen filterIf you drive primarily in urban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air from industry andfrom diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000miles (24,000 km).

Inspect drive beltReplace transmission fluidReplace spark plugsInspect valve clearanceReplace engine coolant

Maintenance Main ItemsReplace engine oilReplace engine oil and oil filterInspect front and rear brakesCheck parking brake adjustmentVisually inspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and line (including ABS/VSA)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

AB

Symbol Symbol12

34

5

Main

tenance

Min

der

09/07/07 14:38:50 31SVA640_302

＊

＊

Fluid Locations

DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX, and EX-L models

298

RADIATOR CAP

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange handle)

BRAKE FLUID(Black cap)

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

CLUTCH FLUID(Manualtransmission only)(Light gray cap)

ENGINE COOLANTRESERVOIR

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

: Except for Canadian DX-G with manual transmission

POWER STEERING FLUID(Red cap)

09/07/07 14:38:55 31SVA640_303

Fluid Locations

Si modelM

aintenance

299

ENGINE COOLANTRESERVOIR

CLUTCH FLUID(Light gray cap)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

RADIATOR CAP

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange handle)

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP BRAKE FLUID(Black cap)

09/07/07 14:39:00 31SVA640_304

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-gradedetergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, andtighten it securely. Wait a fewminutes, and recheck the oil level onthe engine oil dipstick. Do not fillabove the upper mark; you coulddamage the engine.

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on the valve cover. Pour theoil slowly and carefully so you do notspill any. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Recommended Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil

300

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP ENGINE OIL FILL CAP


09/07/07 14:39:10 31SVA640_305

－

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect the engine or transmissionperformance and durability.An oil with a viscosity of 5W-30 is

preferred for improved fuel economyand year-round protection in yourvehicle. You may use a 10W-30 oil ifthe temperature in your area nevergoes below 20°F ( 7°C).

Make sure the API Certification Sealsays ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.

5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your vehicle, toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle.

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals shown on the informationdisplay.

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Si model:

DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX, andEX-L models:

Adding Engine Oil

Maintenance

301

Ambient Temperature

Ambient Temperature

09/07/07 14:39:20 31SVA640_306

Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the informationdisplay. The oil and filter collectcontaminants that can damage yourengine if they are not removedregularly.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledtechnician.

1. 2.

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

302

DRAIN BOLTWASHER


WASHER DRAIN BOLT

09/07/07 14:39:29 31SVA640_307

Remove the oil filter, and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

Refill the engine with therecommended oil.Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.

Make sure to clean off any dirtand dust on the contacting surfaceof a new oil filter.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten the drain bolt to:

Make sure the oil filter gasket isnot stuck to the contacting surfaceof the engine. If it is, remove itbefore installing a new oil filter.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine, and check your work.

5.

6.

7.

8.

3. 4.

Si


CONTINUED

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

Maintenance

303

OIL FILTER


OILFILTER

3.9 US qt (3.7 )

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

4.6 US qt (4.4 )

09/07/07 14:39:42 31SVA640_308

Always use Honda Long-life Anti-freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolantis pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent distilledwater. Never add straight antifreezeor plain water.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel on the dipstick. If necessary,add more oil.

9. Adding Engine Coolant

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter, Engine Coolant

304

DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX, EX-L Si

RESERVE TANK RESERVE TANK

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

09/07/07 14:39:50 31SVA640_309

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

Relieve any pressure in the coolingsystem by turning the radiator capcounterclockwise, withoutpressing down.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Engine Coolant

Maintenance

305

RADIATOR CAP


Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

09/07/07 14:39:57 31SVA640_310

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spill immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Put the radiator cap back on, andtighten it fully.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

3. 4.

5.

6.

Engine Coolant

306

Si Si

RESERVE TANKRADIATOR CAP RESERVE TANK


09/07/07 14:40:07 31SVA640_311

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

The low washerlevel indicator comes on when thelevel is low (see page ).

Check the fluid level by removingthe cap and looking at the levelgauge.

63

On Canadian models:

Windshield Washers

Maintenance

307

LEVEL GAUGE

LEVEL GAUGE

Si


Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

09/07/07 14:40:15 31SVA640_312

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the dipstickhole to bring it to the levelbetween the upper and lowermarks.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Start the engine, let it run until theradiator fan comes on, then shutoff the engine. For accurateresults, wait about 60 seconds (butno longer than 90 seconds) beforedoing step 2.

Remove the dipstick, and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Always use Honda GenuineATF-Z1 (automatic transmissionfluid).

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

3.

4.

1.

2.

5.

6.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

308

LOWERMARK

UPPERMARK

DIPSTICK

09/07/07 14:40:26 31SVA640_313

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground. Remove thetransmission filler bolt, and carefullyfeel inside the bolt hole with yourfinger. The fluid level should be upto the edge of the bolt hole. If it isnot, add Honda ManualTransmission Fluid (MTF) until itstarts to run out of the hole. Reinstallthe filler bolt, and tighten it securely.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the maintenance minder (see page

).

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification Seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives, and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.

291

CONTINUED

Manual Transmission Fluid

Automatic Transmission Fluid, Manual Transmission Fluid

Maintenance

309

FILLER BOLT

Correct Level

Correct LevelSiDX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX, EX-L

FILLER BOLT

Use only Honda Genuine ATF-Z1(automatic transmission f luid). Do notmix with other transmission f luids.Using transmission f luid other thanHonda Genuine ATF-Z1 may causedeterioration in transmission operationand durability, and could result indamage to the transmission.Damage resulting f rom the use oftransmission f luid other than HondaGenuine ATF-Z1 is not covered by theHonda new vehicle warranty.

09/07/07 14:40:37 31SVA640_314

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Check the brake fluid level in thereservoirs monthly.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the maintenance minder (see page

).

If you are not sure how to check andadd fluid, contact your dealer.

Independent of the maintenanceminder display, replace the brakefluid every 3 years.

291

Brake SystemBrake and Clutch Fluid

Manual Transmission Fluid, Brake and Clutch Fluid

310

MAX

MIN

09/07/07 14:40:47 31SVA640_315

Manual Transmission only

All models except Si and Canadian DX-Gwith manual transmissionThe fluid level should be between

the MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If it is not, addbrake fluid to bring it up to that level.Use the same fluid specified for thebrake system.

A low fluid level can indicate a leakin the clutch system. Have thissystem inspected as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergencyreplacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill any. Clean up anyspill immediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

Check the level on the side of thereservoir when the engine is cold.The fluid should be between theUPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.If not add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL mark.

Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering Fluid

Power Steering FluidClutch FluidM

aintenance

311

MAX

MIN

UPPER LEVEL

LOWER LEVEL

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

09/07/07 14:40:58 31SVA640_316

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its base, and protect the glassfrom contact with your skin or hardobjects. If you touch the glass, cleanit with denatured alcohol and a cleancloth.

Open the hood.

To change a bulb on the driver’sside, remove the coolant tube fromthe two clips, then remove thereserve tank from its holder bypulling it straight up.

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk, readjustment may be required.Adjustments should be done by yourdealer or another qualifiedtechnician.

1.

Lights

Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb High Beam Headlight

312

COOLANTTUBE

CLIP

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

09/07/07 14:41:08 31SVA640_317

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,and turn it one-quarter turnclockwise to lock it in place.

Remove the bulb by turning itabout one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab to unlock it, then slide theconnector off the bulb.

(Driver’s side)Put the tube back in the clips andinstall the reserve tank back inplace, making sure its bottom tabis in the holder.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

CONTINUED

Lights

Maintenance

313

TAB

BULB

CONNECTORHOLDER

09/07/07 14:41:19 31SVA640_318

To change the driver’s side bulb,start the engine, turn the steeringwheel all the way to the right, andturn off the engine. To change thepassenger’s side bulb, turn thesteering wheel to the left. Remove the electrical connector

from the bulb by pushing on thetab to unlock it, then slide theconnector off the bulb.

Remove the bulb from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.



Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Use a Phillips-head screwdriver toremove the screw from the innerfender, and pull the inner fendercover back.

Reinstall the inner fender cover.Then reinstall the screw andtighten it securely.

2.1.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Lights

Low Beam Headlight

314

SCREW BULB

ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR

09/07/07 14:41:29 31SVA640_319

Remove the bulb from the socketby pushing the bulb in and turningit counterclockwise until it unlocks.

Install the new bulb in the socket.Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

To change the driver’s side bulb,start the engine, turn the steeringwheel all the way to the right, andturn off the engine. To change thepassenger’s side bulb, turn thesteering wheel to the left.

Use a Phillips-head screwdriver toremove the screw from the innerfender, and pull the inner fendercover back.

Reinstall the inner fender cover.Then reinstall the screw andtighten it securely.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

3.

2.1.

Lights

Replacing the Front Side Marker/Parking/Turn Signal Light Bulb

Maintenance

315

09/07/07 14:41:42 31SVA640_320

Open the trunk.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Remove the screw in the center ofthe fastener on the side of thetrunk lining. Pull the lining back.

Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

Reinstall the trunk lining. Makesure it is installed under the edgeof the trunk seal.

Put the fastener into the hole onthe side of the trunk lining.Reinstall the screw.

Determine which of the four bulbsis burned out: stop/taillight,back-up light, side marker light, orturn signal light.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

1. 2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Replacing Rear Bulbs

Lights

316

FASTENER

09/07/07 14:41:54 31SVA640_321

If equippedYour vehicle uses halogen lightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its plastic case, and protect theglass from contact with your skin orhard objects. If you touch the glass,clean it with denatured alcohol and aclean cloth.

The fog lights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk, readjustment may be required.Adjustment should be done by yourdealer or another qualifiedtechnician.

Remove the mounting bolts with awrench.

Pull the fog light assembly fromthe bumper while taking out thetabs from the bracket.

1. 2.

CONTINUED

Replacing a Fog Light Bulb

Lights

Maintenance

317

MOUNTING BOLTS

Halogen light bulbs get very hot whenlit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch onthe glass can cause the bulb to overheatand shatter.

09/07/07 14:42:05 31SVA640_322

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

Remove the bulb from the foglight assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.



Turn on the fog lights to test thenew bulb.

Reinstall the fog light assemblyinto the bumper while setting thetabs in the bracket. Tighten themounting bolts securely.

The license plate has two lightsabove it. You can access either ofthem from the back of the trunk lid.If your vehicle has a trunk lining,these bulbs should be replaced byyour dealer.

6.

7.

8.

4.

5.

3.

Lights

Rear License Plate Light Bulbs

318

ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR

TAB

09/07/07 14:42:16 31SVA640_323

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air-dry beforeyou use the vehicle.

Remove the socket from the lightassembly by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise.

Open the trunk, then remove theholding clips from the cover, andremove the cover.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Reinstall the socket. Turn itclockwise until it locks. Make surethe new bulb is working.

Reinstall the cover, and tighten itsholding clips securely.

The high-mount brake light shouldbe replaced by your dealer.

2.

1.

3.

4.

5.

CONTINUED

On DX, Canadian DX-G, and LX models

On EX, EX-L, and Si models

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

Cleaning the Seat Belts

Lights, Cleaning the Seat Belts

Maintenance

319

SOCKET

LOOP

BULB

09/07/07 14:42:30 31SVA640_324

If equipped

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

If you remove a floor mat, make sureto re-anchor it when you put it backin your vehicle.

If you use a non-Honda floor mat,make sure it fits properly and that itcan be used with the floor matanchors. Do not put additional floormats on top of the anchored mat.

The driver’s and right rearpassenger’s floor mats that camewith your vehicle hook over the floormat anchors. This keeps the floormats from sliding forward andpossibly interfering with the pedals(driver’s floor mat) or with the seatweight sensors (right rear floor mat).

Floor Mats

Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats

320

09/07/07 14:42:38 31SVA640_325

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, areas that aregetting hard, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

This filter removes the dust andpollen that is brought in from theoutside through the heating andcooling system.

Have your dealer replace the filterwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message on theinformation display. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles (24,000km) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air, or if the flow fromthe heating and cooling systembecomes less than usual.

To replace a wiper blade:

Raise each wiper arm off thewindshield, lifting the driver’s sidefirst, then the passenger’s side.

1.

CONTINUED

On models with A/CWiper BladesDust and Pollen Filter

Dust and Pollen Filter, Wiper Blades

Maintenance

321

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and wiper arms.

09/07/07 14:42:50 31SVA640_326

Slide the blade out of the holder.Pull up the cover release tab onthe end of the blade assembly,then remove the cover.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe release button. Then slide theblade assembly out of the wiperarm.

2. 3. 4.

Wiper Blades

322

BLADE

HOLDER

RELEASE BUTTON COVER

RELEASE TAB

09/07/07 14:42:58 31SVA640_327

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

Align the slots in the new bladewith the retaining edges on theholder, then slide the blade ontothe holder. Keep about 1 inch ofthe holder extended from theblade assembly so you canreinstall the cover.

Reinstall the cover onto the bladeassembly.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield, the passenger’sside first, then the driver’s side.

5.

6.

7.

8.

CONTINUED

Inflation GuidelinesTires

Wiper Blades, Tires

Maintenance

323

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

09/07/07 14:43:11 31SVA640_328

If you check air pressures when thetires are hot (driven for severalmiles/kilometers), you will seereadings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreadings. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the recommendedcold air pressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) permonth. Remember to check thespare tire at the same time.

Check the air pressures when thetires are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at least 3hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km). Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressures on this page.

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

Even though your vehicle isequipped with TPMS, werecommend that you visually checkyour tires every day.

The tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) warns you when a tirepressure is low. See page formore information.

284

U.S. models

Tires

324

09/07/07 14:43:20 31SVA640_329

The following charts show therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions.

For additional information aboutyour tires, see page .

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold tire pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

We strongly recommend that you donot drive faster than the postedspeed limits and conditions allow. Ifyou ever drive in a sanctionedcompetitive event at sustained highspeeds (over 118 mph or 190 km/h),be sure to adjust the cold tirepressures as shown below. If you donot, excessive heat can build up andcause sudden tire failure.

Front/Rear:367

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure

Tire Size Cold Tire PressureFront/Rear




CONTINUED

LX, EX, EX-L

Si

DX and Canadian DX-G with automatictransmission

Canadian DX-G with manual transmission

Optional Summer Tire for U.S. Si

Si model only

Si model only

Tires

Recommended Tire Pressures High Speed Driving

Tire Size·Cold Tire Pressure for HighSpeed Driving

Maintenance

325

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )

P215/45R17 87V

215/45ZR17 91W 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2kgf/cm )

P215/45R17 87V

P195/65R15 89H 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2kgf/cm )

P195/65R15 89S 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2kgf/cm )

P205/55R16 89H 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2kgf/cm )

09/07/07 14:43:42 31SVA640_330

A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see a 1/2inch (12.7 mm) wide band across thetread. This shows there is less than1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left onthe tire.

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

When you return to normal speeddriving, be sure to readjust the tirepressure for normal driving. Youshould wait until the tires are coldbefore adjusting the tire pressure.

Tire pressure for high speed drivingis the same as for normal driving.

Except Si model

Tires

Tire Inspection

326

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR

09/07/07 14:43:53 31SVA640_331

For vehicles equipped with aluminumwheels:

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

The last four digits of the TIN (tireidentification number) are found onthe sidewall of the tire and indicatethe date of manufacture (See

on page ).

The service life of your tires isdependent on many factors,including, but not limited to, drivinghabits, road conditions, vehicleloading, inflation pressure,maintenance history, speed, andenvironmental conditions (evenwhen the tires are not in use).

In addition to your regularinspections and inflation pressuremaintenance, it is recommended thatyou have annual inspectionsperformed once the tires reach fiveyears old. It is also recommendedthat all tires, including the spare, beremoved from service after 10 yearsfrom the date of manufacture,regardless of their condition or stateof wear.

369

Tires

Tire Maintenance

TireLabeling

Tire Service LifeM

aintenance

327

Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly Honda wheel weights f orbalancing.

09/07/07 14:44:02 31SVA640_332

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires according to themaintenance messages displayed onthe information display.Move the tires to the positionsshown in the illustration each timethey are rotated. If you purchasedirectional tires, rotate only front-to-back.

The mileage you can expect fromyour vehicle tires is the same ascomparable mid-and rear-enginesports cars, and it will vary greatlywith your driving habits.

If you drive moderately, the fronttires could last more than 10,000miles (16,000 km). However, themileage will be substantially less ifyou tend to drive your vehicle at theupper limits of its capabilities.

You should carefully inspect yourvehicle’s tires for wear, damage, andproper inflation every 7,500 miles(12,000 km).

As a trade-off, they will wear morerapidly than tires used on ordinarypassenger vehicles. Because of thevehicle’s weight distribution, and thefact that the front wheels are thedriving wheels, you can expect themto wear more rapidly than the reartires.

The tires that came on your vehiclewere designed and constructed toprovide superior grip duringacceleration, braking, and cornering.

When the tires are rotated, makesure the air pressures are checked.

Si model only

Tires

Tire Rotation

Tire Wear

328

Front Front

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

09/07/07 14:44:13 31SVA640_333

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall).

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS and vehicle stability assistsystem (VSA) to work inconsistently.

The ABS and VSA system (ifequipped) work by comparing thespeed of each wheel. When replacingtires, use the same size originallysupplied with the vehicle. Tire sizeand construction can affect wheelspeed and may cause the system toactivate.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.

Also be sure you use only TPMSspecific wheels. If you do not, thetire pressure monitoring system willnot work.

Replacement wheels are available atyour dealer.

On vehicles with TPMS

Tires

Replacing Tires and WheelsM

aintenance

329

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

09/07/07 14:44:23 31SVA640_334

＋Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

Wheels:Tires:

If your vehicle is equipped withsummer tires, be aware that thesetires are not designed for winterdriving conditions. For moreinformation, consult your dealer.

See page for information aboutDOT Tire Quality Grading, and page

for tire size and labelinginformation.

DX and Canadian DX-G

Si

Si

LX, EX, EX-L

LX, EX, EX-L

DX and Canadian DX-G withautomatic transmission

Canadian DX-G with manualtransmission

367

369

Si model only

Optional for U.S. Si

Tires

Winter DrivingWheel and Tire Specifications

Summer Tires

330

15 x 6J

16 x 6 1/2J

17 x 7J

P195/65R15 89H

215/45ZR17 91W

P215/45R17 87V

P205/55R16 89H

P195/65R15 89S

(all season tire)

(summer tire)

09/07/07 14:44:36 31SVA640_335

Mount tire chains on your tires whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Install them only on thefront tires.

If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas original tires. Mount snow tires onall four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

When installing chains, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, Honda stronglyrecommends using the chains listedbelow, made by Security ChainCompany (SCC).

Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain

CONTINUED

Tires

Tire ChainsSnow TiresM

aintenance

331

CH2311T

09/07/07 14:44:45 31SVA640_336

Clean the wheels as you would therest of the exterior. Wash them withthe same solution, and rinse themthoroughly.

Aluminum alloy wheels have aprotective clear-coat that keeps thealuminum from corroding andtarnishing. Cleaning the wheels withharsh chemicals (including somecommercial wheel cleaners) or a stiffbrush can damage the clear-coat. Toclean the wheels, use a milddetergent and a soft brush or sponge.

If equipped

Wheels

Tires

332

Using the wrong chains, or notproperly installing chains, candamage the brake lines andcause a crash in which you canbe seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding theselection and use of tire chains.

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

09/07/07 14:44:52 31SVA640_337

Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified technician.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfurther corrosion.

The location of the test indicatorwindow varies betweenmanufacturers.

CONTINUED

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Checking the Battery

Maintenance

333

DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX, EX-L Si

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

09/07/07 14:45:02 31SVA640_338

－

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, the audiosystem may disable itself. The nexttime you turn on the radio, you willsee ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in thefrequency display. Use the presetbuttons to enter the code (see page

).

The navigation system will alsodisable itself. The next time you turnon the ignition switch, the systemwill require you to enter a PINbefore it can be used. Refer to thenavigation system manual.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected, or goes dead, the timesetting may be lost. To reset the time,see page .

221

222

On models with navigation system

Checking the Battery

334

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledtechnician do the batterymaintenance.

09/07/07 14:45:09 31SVA640_339

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

Fill the fuel tank.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fans cycle on and offtwice). Preferably, do this once amonth.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand trunk seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand trunk seals.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

Disconnect the battery.Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in reverse(manual) or Park (automatic).

Vehicle Storage

Maintenance

335

09/07/07 14:45:21 31SVA640_340

336

09/07/07 14:45:23 31SVA640_341

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 338....................Changing a Flat Tire . 339

.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 343................................Jump Starting . 345

..............If the Engine Overheats . 347.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 349..........Charging System Indicator . 349

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 350...............Brake System Indicator . 351

..............................................Fuses . 352..............................Fuse Locations . 356

......................Emergency Towing . 358

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

337

09/07/07 14:45:28 31SVA640_342

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Check the air pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

Do not mount tire chains on thecompact spare tire.

Do not use a compact spare tiremounted on a front wheel; it willdamage the limited slip differential(see page ).

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some roadsurfaces. Use greater cautionwhile driving.

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

Follow these precautions:The low tire pressure indicatorcomes on and stays on after youreplace the flat tire with thecompact spare tire. After severalmiles (kilometers) driving with thecompact spare tire, the TPMSindicator comes on and the lowtire pressure indicator goes off.

339

All U.S. models

On Si model

Compact Spare Tire

338

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

09/07/07 14:45:40 31SVA640_343

CONTINUED

If you have a flat tire while driving,pull over safely. Drive slowly alongthe shoulder until you get to an areafar away from traffic lanes.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Have allpassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park (automatic)or reverse (manual). Apply theparking brake.

Open the trunk. Raise the trunkfloor by lifting up on the back edge.

Unscrew the wing bolt, and takethe spare tire out of its well.

Take the tool kit case out of thetrunk.

The compact spare tire is smallerthan a standard tire, and it will affectthe vehicle’s handling. Drivecautiously when the spare ismounted on your vehicle.

The size difference may also causedamage to the differential, so do notmount the compact spare on thefront. If either front tire goes flat,remove the rear tire on that sameside, mount the compact spare tireon the rear, then mount the rear tireon the front. 5.

4.

3.

2.

1.

On Si model only

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

339

SPARE TIRETRUNK FLOOR

JACK TOOL CASE

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

09/07/07 14:45:51 31SVA640_344

Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tire you need tochange. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.Remove the center cap from the

wheel with the extension.

6. 7. 8.Canadian DX-G model


340

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

JACKING POINTS

09/07/07 14:45:59 31SVA640_345

CONTINUED

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Handle thewheel nuts carefully; they may behot from driving. Place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface facing up.

Do not attempt to forcibly pry thewheel cover off with a screwdriveror other tool. The wheel covercannot be removed without firstremoving the wheel nuts.

11.9.

10.

DX, and U.S. LX models


Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

341

WHEEL NUTS WHEEL COVER BRAKE HUB

WHEEL NUTS

WHEEL NUT WRENCH EXTENSION

09/07/07 14:46:09 31SVA640_346

Remove the center cap from theflat tire.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.

Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tighten thewheel nuts fully.

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

14. 15.

13.

12. On EX, EX-L and Si models in the U.S.,and LX, EX-L and Si models inCanada


342

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

09/07/07 14:46:17 31SVA640_347

Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position:

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

Store the wheel cover or centercap in the trunk. Make sure it doesnot get scratched or damaged.

Lower the trunk floor, then closethe trunk lid.

Your vehicle’s original tire has atire pressure monitoring systemsensor. To replace a tire, refer to

(seepage ).

Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt.

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

Store the jack and tools in the toolkit case. Place the tool kit case inthe center of the flat tire.

20.

21.

22.

16.

17.

18.

19.286

On all U.S. models

Changing a Flat Tire, If the Engine Won’t Start

If the Engine Won’t Start

Changing a Tire with TPMS

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

343

For normaltire

WING BOLT

Forcompactspare tire

SPACER CONE

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

09/07/07 14:46:30 31SVA640_348

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).

Turn the ignition switch to theSTART (III) position. If theheadlights do not dim, check thecondition of the fuses. If the fusesare OK, there is probablysomething wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. See

on page .

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery isdischarged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery and terminal connec-tions (see page ). You canthen try jump starting the vehiclefrom a booster battery (see page

).

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even faster

than normal, when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position, but the engine does not run.

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

When you turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, you do nothear the normal noise of the enginetrying to start. You may hear aclicking sound, a series of clicks, ornothing at all.Check these things:

Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, it must bein Park or neutral.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

78

345

358

333

345

270

352

358

If the Engine Won’t Start

Starting theEngine

Emergency Towing

The Starter Operates NormallyEmergency

Towing

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

344

09/07/07 14:46:45 31SVA640_349

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

Open the hood, and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

To jump start your vehicle:

Turn off all the electricalaccessories: heater, A/C, audiosystem, lights, etc. Put thetransmission in neutral (manual)or Park (automatic), and set theparking brake.

The numbers in the illustrationsshow you the order to connect thejumper cables.

You cannot start a vehicle with anautomatic transmission by pushingor pulling it.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Jump Starting

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

345

BOOSTER BATTERY


A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

09/07/07 14:46:56 31SVA640_350

－＋

＋

Start the vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive ( ) terminal on thebooster battery.

6.4.

5.

3.

Jump Starting

346

Si Si

BOOSTER BATTERY


09/07/07 14:47:05 31SVA640_351

CONTINUED

Once your vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,then from the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until everything isdisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

If the vehicle overheats, youshould take immediate action. Theonly indication may be thetemperature gauge climbing to orabove the red mark. Or you maysee steam or spray coming fromunder the hood.

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

The reading of the vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange. If it climbs to the redmark, you should determine thereason (hot day, driving up a steephill, etc.).

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in neutral(manual) or Park (automatic), andset the parking brake. Turn off allaccessories, and turn on thehazard warning lights.

7.

1.

2.

Jump Starting, If the Engine Overheats

If the Engine OverheatsTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

347

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugereading at the red mark can causeserious damage to the engine.

09/07/07 14:47:15 31SVA640_352

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and checkthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank (see page

). Add coolant if the level isbelow the MIN mark.

Start the engine, and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum heat. Add coolant to theradiator up to the base of the fillerneck. If you do not have theproper coolant mixture available,you can add plain water.Remember to have the coolingsystem drained and refilled withthe proper mixture as soon as youcan.

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the readingreaches the middle of thetemperature gauge, or lower,before checking the radiator.

7.

8.

9.3.

4.

5.

6.

10.

11.358

257

358Emergency

TowingEmergency

Towing

If the Engine Overheats

348

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

09/07/07 14:47:27 31SVA640_353

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

This indicator should nevercome on when the engine is

running. If it starts flashing or stayson, the oil pressure has dropped verylow or lost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible, and you shouldtake immediate action.

If the charging systemindicator comes on brightly

when the engine is running, thebattery is not being charged.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

1.

2.

3.

4.

255

300

358Emergency Towing

Low Oil Pressure Indicator Charging System Indicator

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

349

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

09/07/07 14:47:38 31SVA640_354

If the indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeincreased emissions. Continuedoperation may cause serious damage.

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,even though it may turn off as youcontinue driving, have your vehiclechecked by the dealer as soon aspossible.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the malfunctionindicator lamp may also come onwith the ‘‘D’’ indicator.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make sure

these codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the indicator coming oncould be due to a loose or missingfuel fill cap. You will also see a‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message onthe information display. Tighten thecap until it clicks at least once.Tightening the cap will not turn theindicator off immediately; it can takeseveral days of normal driving.

If the battery in your vehicle hasbeen disconnected or gone dead,these codes may be erased. It cantake several days of driving undervarious conditions to set the codesagain.

To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, without starting the engine.The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks five times, the readinesscodes are not set. If possible, do nottake your vehicle for an emissionstest until the readiness codes are set.Refer to formore information (see page ).376

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Readiness Codes Emissions Testing

350

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

09/07/07 14:47:47 31SVA640_355

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer, and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

If the brake system indicator comeson while driving, the brake fluid levelis probably low. Press lightly on thebrake pedal to see if it feels normal.If it does, check the brake fluid levelthe next time you stop at a servicestation (see page ).

The brake systemindicator normallycomes on when

you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position and as a reminder tocheck the parking brake. It will stayon if you do not fully release theparking brake.

If the ABS indicator and the VSAsystem indicator (if equipped) comeon with the brake system indicator,have your vehicle inspected by yourdealer immediately.

310

358Emergency

Towing

Brake System Indicator

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

351

CanadaU.S.

09/07/07 14:47:56 31SVA640_356

The vehicle’s fuses are contained intwo fuse boxes.

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, check for ablown fuse first. Determine from thechart on pages and , or thediagram on the fuse box lid, whichfuse or fuses control that device.Check those fuses first, but check allthe fuses before deciding that ablown fuse is the cause. Replace anyblown fuses, and check if the deviceworks.

The interior fuse box is on thedriver’s lower left side.

The under-hood fuse box is in theengine compartment on the driver’sside, next to the brake fluid reservoir.To open it, push the tabs as shown.

356 357

Fuses

Checking and Replacing Fuses

352

UNDER-HOODINTERIOR

TAB

FUSE LABEL

09/07/07 14:48:05 31SVA640_357

CONTINUED

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking through the top at the wireinside. Removing these fusesrequires a Phillips-head screw-driver.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each one with the fusepuller provided on the back of theunder-hood fuse box cover.

4.3.1.

2.

Fuses

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

353

FUSE BLOWN FUSE BLOWN

FUSE PULLER

09/07/07 14:48:15 31SVA640_358

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem in your vehicle.Leave the blown fuse in thatcircuit and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified technician.

Look for a blown wire inside thefuse. If it is blown, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

6.

5.

Fuses

354

BLOWN

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

09/07/07 14:48:23 31SVA640_359

Your vehicle has spare fuses on theback of the under-hood fuse boxcover.

If the driver’s power window fuse isremoved, the AUTO function of thedriver’s window will be disabled. Youshould reset the AUTO feature, (seepage ).103

All models except DX and CanadianDX-G

Fuses

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

355

FUSE PULLER

SPARE FUSES

09/07/07 14:48:28 31SVA640_360

＊

＊

＊

－

－

－

－

＊＊

No.

No.

Amps.

Amps.

Circuits Protected

Circuits Protected

1

2

3

4

567

89

1011121314151617181920212223

100 A(70 A)60 A50 A30 A30 A40 A50 A40 A

If equipped

20 A30 A20 A40 A40 A10 A15 A15 A

7.5 A

(15 A)15 A15 A

7.5 A15 A

7.5 A10 A

Main FuseEPSOption MainIgnition Switch MainABS/VSA MotorABS/VSA F/S

Headlight MainPower Window Main

Not UsedSub Fan MotorMain Fan Motor (A/T)Main Fan Motor (M/T)Rear DefrosterBlowerHazardFI SubStop, HornNot UsedNot UsedOil Level SensorNot UsedAudio AmpIgnition CoilFI MainMG ClutchDBWInterior LightBack Up

1 :2 :

EX-L and Si models1

2

2

Fuse Locations

356

UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

09/07/07 14:48:36 31SVA640_361

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

＊

No. No. Amps. Circuits Protected

No. Circuits ProtectedAmps.

Circuits ProtectedAmps.12345678

9

10111213141516

7.5 A

7.5 A10 A10 A10 A

7.5 A7.5 A10 A

ODS (Occupant DetectionSystem)MeterSRSRight Headlight High BeamLeft Headlight High BeamSmall Lights (Interior)Small Lights (Exterior)Right Headlight Low Beam

1718192021222324252627282930

3132333435363738

Left Headlight Low BeamHeadlight High Beam MainSmall Lights MainNot UsedHeadlight Low Beam MainNot UsedNot UsedMoonroofDoor LockDriver’s Power WindowHAC OptionRear Accessory SocketAccessoryFront Passenger’s PowerWindowNot UsedNot UsedNot UsedNot UsedAccessory, RadioIG2 HACDaytime Running LightsFront Wiper

10 A20 A15 A

20 A

(20 A)20 A20 A

(20 A)(15 A)15 A20 A

7.5 A10 A7.5 A30 A

Power WindowFuel PumpIG1 ACGABS/VSAHeated SeatsFront Fog LightsTPMSNot Used

If equipped

7.5 A15 A10 A7.5 A(15 A)(20 A)(7.5 A)

:

Fuse Locations

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

357

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

09/07/07 14:48:48 31SVA640_362

－

－

If, due to damage, your vehicle mustbe towed with the front wheels onthe ground, do this:

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

There are two ways to tow yourvehicle:

The operatorloads your vehicle on the back of atruck.

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the front tires and lift them offthe ground. The rear tires remain onthe ground.

Do not tie down the vehicle at anangle that would allow the towingcables to contact the vehicle’s frontbumper. To avoid possible damage,protect the front bumper with tape.

With the front wheels on the ground,do not tow the vehicle more than 50miles (80 km), and keep the speedbelow 35 mph (55 km/h).

If your vehicle is equipped with afront spoiler, remove it beforetowing so it is not damaged.

Start the engine.

Release the parking brake.

Release the parking brake.

Shift the transmission to neutral.Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.

Shift to D position and hold for 5seconds, then to N.Turn off the engine.Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.

Manual transmission:

Automatic transmission:

Flat-bed Equipment

Wheel-lif t Equipment

This is the best way totransport your vehicle.

This is an acceptableway to tow your vehicle.

Emergency Towing

358

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine (automatic transmission), yourvehicle must be transported with thef ront wheels of f the ground.

09/07/07 14:49:04 31SVA640_363

Emergency Towing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

359

Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the vehicle’s weight.

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)position, and make sure the steeringwheel turns f reely bef ore you begintowing.

09/07/07 14:49:09 31SVA640_364

360

09/07/07 14:49:11 31SVA640_365

－

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 362................................Specifications . 364

DOT Tire Quality Grading......................(U.S. Vehicles) . 367

Uniform Tire Quality..................................Grading . 367.................................Treadwear . 367

......................................Traction . 367.............................Temperature . 368

.................................Tire Labeling . 369Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) Required Federal............................Explanation . 371

.......................Emissions Controls . 373.....................The Clean Air Act . 373

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 373

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 373

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 373

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 374....................PGM-FI System . 374

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 374

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 374

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 374

....................Replacement Parts . 374..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 375

........................Emissions Testing . 376

Technical Information

TechnicalInform

ation

361

09/07/07 14:49:15 31SVA640_366

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers located in various places.

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver’s side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on thecertification label.

To access the VIN in the enginecompartment, slide the lid on theback of the engine compartment.Make sure to close the lid beforeclosing the hood.

Identif ication Numbers

362

CERTIFICATION LABEL

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

LID

09/07/07 14:49:21 31SVA640_367

The engine number is stamped intothe engine block. It is on the front.

The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

Identif ication Numbers

TechnicalInform

ation

363

MANUAL TRANSMISSIONNUMBER

Si

ENGINE NUMBER

ENGINE NUMBER

AUTOMATIC/MANUALTRANSMISSION NUMBER

DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX, and EX-L

09/07/07 14:49:27 31SVA640_368

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

Specifications

364

Dimensions Engine

Seating Capacities

Weights

175.5 in (4,457 mm)68.9 in (1,751 mm)55.0 in (1,396 mm)104.3 in (2,650 mm)59.0 in (1,499 mm)60.1 in (1,526 mm)

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

Type

Bore x Stroke

Displacement

Compression ratio

Spark plugs

Spark plugs

3.19 x 3.44 in (81.0 x 87.3 mm)3.39 x 3.39 in (86 x 86 mm)

110 cu-in (1,799 cm )122 cu-in (1,998 cm )

10.511.0IZFR6K-11SSKJ20DR-M11SIFR7G-11KSSK22PR-M11S

Water cooled 4-strokeSOHC i-VTEC , DOHC i-VTEC

4-cylinder gasoline engine

TotalFrontRear

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

523

FrontRear

1 :2 :

DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX, EX-LSi

NGK:DENSO:

NGK:DENSO:

1

2

1 2

1

2

1

2

1

2

09/07/07 14:49:43 31SVA640_369

－－

＊

＊

－－－

－－－－－－－－－－

＊

＊＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications

TechnicalInform

ation

365

Air ConditioningCapacities

Lights

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant oil type

HFC-134a (R-134a)14.1 15.9 oz (400 450 g)

SP-10

60 W12 V12 V12 V

51 W28/8 W

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining inthe engineReserve tank capacity:Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

13.2 US gal (50 )1.45 US gal (5.5 )1.37 US gal (5.2 )1.19 US gal (4.5 )1.88 US gal (7.1 )1.72 US gal (6.5 )1.80 US gal (6.8 )

3.9 US qt (3.7 )4.6 US qt (4.4 )3.7 US qt (3.5 )4.4 US qt (4.2 )4.8 US qt (4.5 )5.8 US qt (5.5 )1.5 US qt (1.4 )1.6 US qt (1.5 )1.7 US qt (1.6 )1.8 US qt (1.7 )2.5 US qt (2.4 )6.08 US qt (5.75 )

2.6 US qt (2.5 )4.8 US qt (4.5 )

0.11 US gal (0.4 )

Fuel tankEnginecoolant

Engine oil

Manualtransmissionfluid

AutomatictransmissionfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V

5 W8 W8 W3 CP21 W18 W3 CP21/5 W21 W

12 V 55 W

Headlights (HI)Headlights (LO)Front turn signal/Side marker/Parking lightFog lightsRear turn signal lightsStop/TaillightsRear side marker lightsBack-up lightsHigh-mount brake lightLicense plate lightsCeiling lightSpotlightsTrunk light

Change

Total

ChangeIncludingfilterWithout filter

Total

Change

Total

ChangeTotal

U.S. VehiclesCanadaVehicles

Approx.

Si

A/TM/T

A/TM/T (HB3)

(HB4)

EX, EX-L, Si:

U.S.: DX, LX, EX, EX-L

U.S. DX and LXCanada: DX, DX-G, LX

1 :

Replacement of the light should be done by yourdealer.

2 : If equipped

(H11)

1 :

2 :3 :4 :

Canada: DX, DX-G, LX, EX-L

(Amber)

(Amber)

2

1

1

2

3

3

4

3

3

4

3

4

3

4

3

4

3

4

3

4

09/07/07 14:50:10 31SVA640_370

－－

＊＊＊

－－－－

＊＊

＊

＊＊＊＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications

366

Battery

Fuses

Alignment

Tires

P195/65R15 89HCapacity

Interior

Under-hood

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.08 in (2.0 mm)

0°

12 V 36 AH/5 HR

45 AH/20 HR38 AH/5 HR

47 AH/20 HR12 V

12 V12 V

Toe-in

Camber

Caster 7°1°30’

T135/80R16 101MT125/70D15 95M215/45ZR17 91WP215/45R17 87VP205/55R16 89H

0°45’

P195/65R15 89S

See page 357 or the fuse labelattached to the dashboard.See page 356 or the fuse boxcover.

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

Size

Pressure

1 :2 :3 :

U.S.: DX, LX, EX, EX-L

Si

LX, EX, EX-LSi (all season tires)

FrontRearFrontRear

Front

1 :2 :

LX, Canadian DX-G (M/T), EX, EX-LDX, Canadian DX-G (A/T)

U.S.: DXCanada: DX, DX-G with automatic transmissionCanada: DX-G with manual transmission

Optional for U.S. Si (summer tires)

Canada: DX, DX-G, LX, EX-L

U.S.: DX, LX, EX

1 :

2 :3 :4 :5 :6 :

7 :Canada: DX, DX-G, LXU.S.: EX-L and SiCanada: EX-L and Si

Front/Rear

Spare

Front/RearSpare

5

1

1

2, 3

2, 3

6

1

2

3

4

1

2

7

09/07/07 14:50:25 31SVA640_371

The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder andmaximum section width. Forexample:

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Treadwear Traction

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

TechnicalInform

ation

367

09/07/07 14:50:35 31SVA640_372

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

Temperature

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

368

09/07/07 14:50:39 31SVA640_373

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Following is an exampleof tire size with an explanation ofwhat each component means.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).

Tire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

Rim diameter in inches.

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

P

R

205

55

16

89

H

CONTINUED

Tire Size

Tire Labeling

TechnicalInform

ation

369

(3)

(4)

Tire Labeling Example

(1)

(2)

(1)

(1) Tire Size(2) Tire Identification Number (TIN)(3) Maximum Tire Pressure(4) Maximum Tire Load

P205/55R16 89H

09/07/07 14:50:50 31SVA640_374

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Tire type code.

Date of manufacture.YearWeek

The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and lettersthat look like the following example.TIN is located on the sidewall of thetire.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

Recommended Inflation PressureThe cold tire inflation pressurerecommended by the manufacturer.

Treadwear Indicators (TWI)Means the projections within theprincipal grooves designed to give avisual indication of the degrees ofwear of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure The tire airpressure when the vehicle has beenparked for at least three hours ordriven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Load Rating Means the maximumload that a tire is rated to carry for agiven inflation pressure.

Maximum Inflation Pressure Themaximum tire air pressure that thetire can hold.

Maximum Load Rating Means theload rating for a tire at the maximumpermissible inflation pressure forthat tire.FW6X

2202

DOT

B97R

Tire Identif ication Number (TIN) Glossary of Tire Terminology

Tire Labeling

370

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

09/07/07 14:51:04 31SVA640_375

－

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale

when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated.(If your vehicle has tires of a

different size than the size indicatedon the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label.

CONTINUED

U.S. models only

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

TechnicalInform

ation

371

09/07/07 14:51:12 31SVA640_376

－

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicatorto indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is provided bya separate telltale, which displays thesymbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated,

the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure asintended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

372

09/07/07 14:51:18 31SVA640_377

＊

＊

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positivecrankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to the

intake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Emissions Controls

TechnicalInform

ation

373

09/07/07 14:51:28 31SVA640_378

The PGM-FI system uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection. It has threesubsystems: air intake, enginecontrol, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM) inautomatic transmission vehicles orthe engine control module (ECM) inmanual transmission vehicles usesvarious sensors to determine how

much air is going into the engine. Itthen controls how much fuel to injectunder all operating conditions.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newHonda replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)system takes some of the exhaustgas and routes it back into the intakemanifold. Adding exhaust gas to theair/fuel mixture reduces the amountof NOx produced when the fuel isburned.

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude three or four systems:PGM-FI, ignition timing control,exhaust gas recirculation (DX,Canadian DX-G, LX, EX and EX-L),and three way catalytic converter.These systems work together tocontrol the engine’s combustion andminimize the amount of HC, CO, andNOx that comes out the tailpipe. Theexhaust emissions control systemsare separate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

2

2

On DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX andEX-L models

Exhaust Emissions Controls

Replacement Parts

Emissions Controls

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

374

09/07/07 14:51:40 31SVA640_379

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperature

for the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear it. Park your vehicle away fromhigh grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine well maintained.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic Converter

TechnicalInform

ation

375

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX, EX-L Si model

09/07/07 14:51:49 31SVA640_380

If you take your vehicle for anemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 40° and95°F (4° and 35°C).

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 6hours or more.

Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic transmission) orneutral (manual transmission).Increase the engine speed to 2,000rpm, and hold it there until thetemperature gauge rises to at least1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, let the engine idle for 20seconds.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Testing of Readiness Codes

Emissions Testing

376

09/07/07 14:51:58 31SVA640_381

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (automatic) or 5th (manual). Donot use the cruise control. Whentraffic allows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Vehicle speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 30minutes.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

7. 8.

9.

Emissions Testing

TechnicalInform

ation

377

09/07/07 14:52:04 31SVA640_382

378

09/07/07 14:52:07 31SVA640_383

....Customer Service Information . 380....................Warranty Coverages . 381

Reporting Safety Defects..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 382

.....................Authorized Manuals . 383

Warranty and Customer Relations

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

379

09/07/07 14:52:10 31SVA640_384

Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please giveus this information:

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact HondaCustomer Service.

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )

Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicle

Date of purchase

Odometer reading of your vehicle

Your name, address, and tele-phone number

A detailed description of theproblem

Name of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

362

Customer Service Information

380

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Automobile Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7A1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Honda Canada Inc.

Visit www.honda.ca for contactinformation

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9Fax: 1-877-939-0909

Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7546

Customer Relations

09/07/07 14:52:19 31SVA640_385

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Your new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty booklet for exactinformation.

this warranty gives upto 100% credit toward a replacementbattery.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered by a limited warranty.Please read your warranty bookletfor details.

covers all Hondareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

Honda accessories are coveredunder this warranty. Time andmileage limits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty booklet fordetails.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2010 Honda warranty informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2010 warrantymanual that came with your vehicle.

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

381

09/07/07 14:52:31 31SVA640_386

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 NewJersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC20590.You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from .

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

382

http://www.saf ercar.gov

http://www.saf ercar.gov

09/07/07 14:52:37 31SVA640_387

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order by phone or online:

Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

Covers maintenance and recommended procedures forrepair to engine and chassis components. It is writtenfor the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enoughfor most mechanically inclined owners to understand.

Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depthtroubleshooting information for each electrical circuitin your vehicle.

Describes the procedures involved in the replacementof damaged body parts.

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

Authorized Manuals

Authorized

Manuals

383

Publication

Form Number

61SNA0A

61SNA0AEL

61SNA30

31SVA640

31SNA830

31SNAM40

31SVAQ40

HON-R

Form Description

2010 Honda Civic 2/4 door Service Manual

2006-2010 Honda Civic 2/4 door

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2006-2010 Model Series Honda Civic 2/4 door

Body Repair Manual

2010 Honda Civic 2-door Owner’s Manual

2010 Honda Civic Navigation System Manual

2010 Honda Civic Honda Service History

2010 Honda Civic 2-door Technology Reference Guide

Order Form for Previous Years

Indicate Year and Model Desired

www. helminc. com

09/07/07 14:52:48 31SVA640_388

384

09/07/07 14:52:51 31SVA640_389

CONTINUED

........................................AAC . 151, 206...Accessories and Modifications . 261

ACCESSORY (Ignition Key.......................................Position) . 79

............Accessory Power Sockets . 110..................Active Head Restraints . 98................Adding Engine Coolant . 304

....................Additives, Engine Oil . 301...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 21

..........Airbag System Components . 21..............Air Conditioning System . 116

.........................................Usage . 119.......Air Pressure, Tires . 323, 325, 366

......................................Antifreeze . 304Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

...............................Indicator . 59, 280...................................Operation . 280

..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 221Anti-theft Steering Column

..............................................Lock . 79................................Audio System . 121

.....Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 82...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 19

.............Automatic Speed Control . 224

..............Automatic Transmission . 274..........................Capacity, Fluid . 365

...............Checking Fluid Level . 308.......................................Shifting . 274

Shift Lever Position...............................Indicators . 274

................Shift Lever Positions . 275....................Shift Lock Release . 277

............................Capacities Chart . 365

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 57, 349............................Jump Starting . 345

..............................Maintenance . 333............................Specifications . 366

..............................Before Driving . 251....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 18

.........................Beverage Holders . 109........HandsFreeLink . 227

..................................Booster Seats . 47Brakes

...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 280.............Break-in, New Linings . 252

....................Bulb Replacement . 316

...........................................Fluid . 310.......................................Parking . 107

..........................System Design . 279.................System Indicator . 58, 351........................Wear Indicators . 279

.............................Braking System . 279.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 252

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 74Bulb Replacement

..........................Back-up Lights . 316..............................Brake Lights . 316

.................................Fog Lights . 317................Front Parking Lights . 315

........Front Side Marker Lights . 315.................................Headlights . 312

.........High-mount Brake Light . 319................................Rear Lights . 316

............................Specifications . 365....................Turn Signal Lights . 315

......................Bulbs, Halogen . 312, 317Bluetooth

Index

A

B

C IND

EX

I

09/07/07 14:52:58 31SVA640_390

＊

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 50.............................Carrying Cargo . 263

.............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii.........................................CD Care . 216

..........................CD Changer . 137, 178.....CD Changer Error Messages . 139

..............................CD Player . 132, 170..................................Ceiling Light . 113

........................Certification Label . 362............................................Chains . 331

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 339Changing Oil

........................................How to . 302......................................When to . 291

...Charging System Indicator . 57, 349..............Check Fuel Cap Message . 68............Checklist, Before Driving . 269

.....................................Child Safety . 32..............................Booster Seats . 47

...................................Child Seats . 39Important Safety

.........................Reminders . 32, 35..........................................Infants . 37

............................Large Children . 46.........................................LATCH . 41

......................Risks with Airbags . 33

.............................Small Children . 38..........................................Tether . 45

...........................Warning Labels . 51.........Where Should a Child Sit? . 33

Child Seats......................................Installing . 40

.........................................LATCH . 41......................................Selecting . 39

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 45Cleaning

...................................Seat Belts . 319..............................................Clock . 222

...................................Clutch Fluid . 311........................CO in the Exhaust . 373

......................................Coat Hook . 110............Cold Weather, Starting in . 270

......................Compact Spare Tire . 338.................Console Compartment . 109.................Consumer Information . 380

.............Controls, Instruments and . 53Coolant

........................................Adding . 304....................................Checking . 257

.........................Proper Solution . 304...................Temperature Gauge . 68

Crankcase Emissions Control........................................System . 373

................Cruise Control Indicator . 62............Cruise Control Operation . 224

...................................Cup Holders . 109....Customer Service Information . 380

...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii...................................Dashboard . 3, 54

................Daytime Running Lights . 73Daytime Running Lights

.......................................Indicator . 63.................................Dead Battery . 345

.........Defects, Reporting Safety . 382................Defogger, Rear Window . 75..............Defrosting the Windows . 120

....................................Dimensions . 364...............Dimming the Headlights . 72

Dipstick..........Automatic Transmission . 308

..................................Engine Oil . 255..........................Directional Signals . 72

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 279.......................................Disc Care . 216

Index

D

II

09/07/07 15:03:24 31SVA640_391

＊

CONTINUED

............................Disc Player . 132, 170..................Display Change Button . 66

.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 304Doors

.Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 82..............Locking and Unlocking . 80

......................Power Door Locks . 81........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 367

Downshifting, Manual.............................Transmission . 271

...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5...........................................Driving . 267

....................................Economy . 258..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 321

..............................Economy, Fuel . 258Electric Power Steering (EPS)

.......................................Indicator . 60Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

........................................System . 282..................................Emergencies . 337

.............Battery, Jump Starting . 345...........Brake System Indicator . 351

................Changing a Flat Tire . 339

.....Charging System Indicator . 349..................Checking the Fuses . 352

.........Hazard Warning Flashers . 75............................Jump Starting . 345

.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 349...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 350

..................Overheated Engine . 347.......................................Towing . 358

.........................Emergency Brake . 107......................Emergency Flashers . 75

......................Emergency Towing . 358............Emergency Trunk Opener . 92

.......................Emissions Controls . 373........................Emissions Testing . 376

Engine............Adding Engine Coolant . 304

....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 68.........................If It Won’t Start . 343

Malfunction Indicator................................Lamp . 57, 350

.......................Oil Life Indicator . 291........Oil Pressure Indicator . 57, 349

.............................Oil, Synthetic . 301..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 300

...............................Overheating . 347............................Specifications . 364

....................Speed Limiter . 273, 276.......................................Starting . 270

......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 253.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 373

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 50Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

........................................Belts by . 16

....................................Fan Control . 117.........................................Features . 115

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 253Filters

.........................Dust and Pollen . 321...............................................Oil . 302

.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 75...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 339

.....................................Floor Mats . 320

Index

E

F

IND

EX

III

09/07/07 15:03:30 31SVA640_392

Fluids..........Automatic Transmission . 308

..........................................Brake . 310.........................................Clutch . 311

..............Manual Transmission . 309..........................Power Steering . 311

..................Windshield Washer . 307........................................Fog Lights . 73

FM Stereo Radio...................................Reception . 214

...........................Folding Rear Seat . 99..........................Four-way Flashers . 75

..............................Front Airbags . 9, 23Front Seat

......................................Adjusting . 93.....................................Airbags . 9, 23

.................................................Fuel . 252..........Check Fuel Cap Message . 68

....................................Economy . 258......................Fill Door and Cap . 253

...........................................Gauge . 68.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 64

................Octane Requirement . 252...............................Oxygenated . 253

........................Tank, Refueling . 253...............................Fuel Economy . 258

..............................Fuse Locations . 356.....................Fuses, Checking the . 352

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 258.........................................Gasoline . 252...........................................Gauge . 68

.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 64................Octane Requirement . 252

........................Tank, Refueling . 253................Gas Station Procedures . 253

Gauges...Engine Coolant Temperature . 68

...............................................Fuel . 68Gearshift Lever Positions

..........Automatic Transmission . 274..............Manual Transmission . 272

......................................Glove Box . 109Gross Axle Weight Rating

.....................................(GAWR) . 265Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

.....................................(GVWR) . 265

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 312...........................HandsFreeLink . 227

..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 75Headlights

........................................Aiming . 312............Daytime Running Lights . 73

..................High Beam Indicator . 63....................Lights On Indicator . 63

.........................Reminder Chime . 72........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 312

...................................Turning on . 72..............................Head Restraints . 96

.............................Heated Mirrors . 107.................................Heaters, Seat . 101

.....................Heating and Cooling . 116.............High Altitude, Starting at . 270

.......................................High Beam . 72..............High-mount Brake Light . 319

..Hood, Opening and Closing the . 254..............................................Horn . 4, 70

...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 311

Index

G

H

IV

09/07/07 15:03:36 31SVA640_393

CONTINUED

..................................................Keys . 77

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 362Ignition

..............................................Keys . 77...........................................Switch . 79

............Timing Control System . 374........................Immobilizer System . 78

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6Indicators

..............ABS (Anti-Lock Brake) . 59Brake (Parking and Brake

............................System) . 58, 351................Charging System . 57, 349

.............................Cruise Control . 62...................................Door Open . 63

DRL (Daytime Running......................................Lights) . 63

.EPS (Electric Power Steering) . 60.....................................Fog Light . 63...................................High Beam . 63

........Key (Immobilizer System) . 59.....................................Lights On . 63......................................Low Fuel . 64

................Low Oil Pressure . 57, 349..............Low Tire Pressure . 61, 284

..........Maintenance Minder . 60, 291...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 350

....................................REV Limit . 61..........................Security System . 64

.......................................Seat Belt . 57...........................Side Airbag Off . 58

...............................................SRS . 58...................................TPMS . 61, 285

.................................Trunk Open . 63Turn Signal and Hazard

...................................Warning . 59............................VSA Activation . 62

.................................VSA System . 62..............................Washer Level . 63

Indicators, Instrument.......................................Panel . 55, 57

...............................Infant Restraint . 37Infant Seats

......................................Installing . 40................Tether Anchor Points . 45

...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 323........................Information Display . 65

.................................Inside Mirror . 106.............................Inspection, Tire . 326

....................Installing a Child Seat . 40..........Tether Anchorage Points . 45

.............................Using LATCH . 41........................Instrument Panel . 3, 54

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 74................Instrument and Controls . 53

...............................Interior Lights . 113........................................Introduction . i

.......................................iPod . 140, 193

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 340.......................................Jack, Tire . 339

................................Jump Starting . 345

.......................Label, Certification . 362.................Lane Change, Signaling . 72

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 14, 19...............................LATCH System . 41

Index

IND

EX

J

K

L

I

V

09/07/07 15:03:43 31SVA640_394

Lights....................Bulb Replacement . 312

...............................Indicators . 55, 57.........................................Parking . 72

..................................Turn Signal . 72....................................Load Limits . 264

......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 79Locks

.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 79............................Fuel Fill Door . 253

.................................Power Door . 81...........................................Trunk . 91

........................Low Coolant Level . 257.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 64

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 57, 349................................Lower Anchors . 41

...Lower Gear, Downshifting to a . 271

...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 365...........Luggage, Storing (Cargo) . 263

..................................Maintenance . 289..................................Items . 294, 297

........................................Minder . 291.................Minder Indicator . 60, 291

Owner’s Maintenance...................................Checks . 296

..........................................Safety . 290.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 57, 350

...................Manual Transmission . 271...............Checking Fluid Level . 309

.......................................Shifting . 271........Manual Transmission Fluid . 309

....................................Mats, Floor . 320...............................Meters, Gauges . 65

........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 106...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 262

.......................................Moonroof . 104................MP3 . 133, 151, 171, 181, 205

...................Neutral Gear Position . 275..................New Vehicle Break-in . 252

.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 272...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i

...............Numbers, Identification . 362

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 252

.........................................Odometer . 66...............................Odometer, Trip . 66

Oil........................Change, How to . 302......................Change, When to . 291......................Checking Engine . 255..............Pressure Indicator . 57, 349

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 301

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 79Onboard Refueling Vapor

....................................Recovery . 373............................Outside Mirrors . 106

.....................Outside Temperature . 67....................Overheating, Engine . 347

....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 296.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 253

..............Panel Brightness Control . 74........................Park Gear Position . 275

...........................................Parking . 278...............................Parking Brake . 107

Parking Brake and Brake.................System Indicator . 58, 351

Index

N

O

M

P

VI

09/07/07 15:03:51 31SVA640_395

＊

＊

CONTINUED

........................Parking Lights . 72, 316Parking Over Things that

....................................Burn . 278, 375....Passenger Airbag Off Indicator . 30

..........................................PC Card . 180.............PC Card Error Messages . 192

.............................PGM-FI System . 374...................................Pollen Filter . 321

..........................Power Door Locks . 81......Power Socket Locations . 108, 110

....................Power Steering Fluid . 311............................Power Windows . 102

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 16........................Preparing to Drive . 269

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11...Additional Safety Precautions . 16

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 16........................Protecting Children . 32.......................General Guideline . 32

................Installing a Child Seat . 40.......................Protecting Infants . 37

.......Protecting Larger Children . 46.........Protecting Small Children . 38

.................Selecting a Child Seat . 39Using Child Seats with

.....................................Tethers . 45

.............................Using LATCH . 41

..................................Safety Belts . 8, 18.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 382

.................................Safety Features . 7...........................................Airbags . 9

.......................................Seat Belts . 8

...................Radiator Overheating . 347...........Radio/Disc Sound System . 122

Radio/Disc/PC Card/USB Sound........................................System . 157

............................Radio, XM . 127, 161...Recommended Tire Pressures . 325

.................Radio Theft Protection . 221...................Readiness Codes . 350, 376

Rear Lights, Bulb..............................Replacement . 316

............................Rear Seat Access . 94..........................Rear Seat, Folding . 99

...........................Rearview Mirror . 106.................Rear Window Defogger . 75................Reclining the Seat-backs . 93

.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 272........................................Refueling . 253

.................Reminder Indicators . 55, 57................Remote Audio Controls . 219

.......................Remote Transmitter . 87Replacement Information

..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 321

................Engine Oil and Filter . 302..........................................Fuses . 352

................................Light Bulbs . 312................Maintenance Minder . 291

................................Spark Plugs . 364......................Tires and Wheels . 330

.............................Wiper Blades . 321Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 20..........Reporting Safety Defects . 382

Reserve Tank, Engine...............................Coolant . 257, 304

...............................Restraint, Child . 32..................Reverse Gear Position . 275

...........................Reverse Lockout . 273................................Rotation, Tire . 328

Index

IND

EX

R

S

VII

09/07/07 15:03:57 31SVA640_396

＊

.............Safety Labels, Location of . 51..............................Safety Messages . iii

.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 18...............Additional Information . 18

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 19

.....................................Cleaning . 319................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 14, 19

................................Maintenance . 20Reminder Indicator and

................................Beeper . 18, 57...................System Components . 18

...............Use During Pregnancy . 16Wearing a Lap/Shoulder

.....................................Belt . 14, 19.........................Seating Capacities . 364

.................................................Seats . 93......................................Adjusting . 93

.........................................Folding . 99

.......................................Heaters . 101............................Security System . 223

.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 39...............................Serial Number . 362

...........................Service Intervals . 291

...........................Service Manual . 383.........Service Station Procedures . 253

..........................Setting the Clock . 222...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 274

........................Shift Lock Release . 277................................Side Airbags . 9, 27

..........................Off Indicator . 29, 58..................Side Curtain Airbags . 9, 28

Side Marker Lights, Bulb..............................Replacement . 316...............................Signaling Turns . 72

..................................Snow Chains . 331.....................................Snow Tires . 331

...........Sockets, Accessory Power . 110................................Sound System . 121

Spare Tire......................................Inflating . 338

............................Specifications . 366....................................Spark Plugs . 364

................................Specifications . 364

................................Speed Control . 224

........................Speed Limiter . 273, 276.......................................Spotlights . 113

..........SRS, Additional Information . 21...Additional Safety Precautions . 31

.............................Airbag Service . 31......Airbag System Components . 21

How the Passenger Airbag...............Off Indicator Works . 30

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 29

..How the SRS Indicator Works . 29How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 23...How Your Side Airbags Work . 27

How Your Side Curtain Airbags.........................................Work . 28

.............................SRS Indicator . 29, 58....START (Ignition Key Position) . 79

.......................Starting the Engine . 270In Cold Weather at High

..................................Altitude . 270................With a Dead Battery . 345

........Steam Coming from Engine . 347Steering Wheel

................................Adjustments . 76.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 79

Steering Wheel......................Buttons . 219, 224, 227

...................Stereo Sound System . 121....................Storing Your Vehicle . 335

Index

VIII

09/07/07 15:04:02 31SVA640_397

＊

＊

CONTINUED

Supplemental Restraint..................................System . 9, 21......................................Servicing . 31

.........................SRS Indicator . 29, 58...................System Components . 21

SVC (Speed-sensitive Volume..................Compensation) . 126, 168

..................................Synthetic Oil . 301

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 337Technical Descriptions

....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 367.....Emissions Control Systems . 373

Three Way Catalytic.......................Converter . 374, 375

.......................Temperature Gauge . 68.....................Tether Anchor Points . 45

................Theft Protection, Radio . 221Three Way Catalytic

...........................Converter . 374, 375..........................Time, Setting the . 222

....................................Tire Chains . 331.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 339

Tire Pressure Monitoring........................System (TPMS) . 284

...............................................Tires . 323......................Air Pressure . 323, 325

........................................Chains . 331.........................Checking Wear . 326..........................Compact Spare . 338

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 367.Glossary of Tire Terminology . 370

......................................Inflation . 323..................................Inspection . 326

.....................................Labeling . 369Low Tire Pressure

...........................Indicator . 61, 284..............................Maintenance . 327

...................................Replacing . 329......................................Rotating . 328

................................Service Life . 327...........................................Snow . 331

............................Specifications . 366...................Summer Tires . 325, 330

.........................................TPMS . 284...........................................Wear . 328

.......................................Wheels . 332...................Tools, Tire Changing . 339

Towing.....................................A Trailer . 287

................Emergency Wrecker . 358Transmission

Checking Fluid Level,..............................Automatic . 308

Checking Fluid Level,...................................Manual . 309

..................Fluid Selection . 308, 309..............Identification Number . 363.............Shifting the Automatic . 274

..................Shifting the Manual . 271...................................Treadwear . 367

...................Treadwear Indicators . 326.......................................Trip Meter . 66

................................................Trunk . 91....................Emergency Opener . 92

........................................Opening . 91............................Open Indicator . 63

....................................Turn Signals . 72

Index

IND

EX

T

IX

09/07/07 15:04:07 31SVA640_398

＊

＊

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 337

..Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 367........................Unleaded Gasoline . 252

USB Adapter..................Cable . 142, 152, 195, 206

.USB Flash Memory Device . 149, 203.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 304

................................Vanity Mirror . 111.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 264

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 364....Vehicle Identification Number . 362

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA )....................................System . 282

...VSA Activation Indicator . 62, 282.........................VSA Off Switch . 283

........VSA System Indicator . 62, 282.............................Vehicle Storage . 335

.....................................Ventilation . 118.................................................VIN . 362

..................................Viscosity, Oil . 301

............WARNING, Explanation of . iii................Warning Button, Hazard . 75

.........Warning Labels, Location of . 51....................Warranty Coverages . 381

Washer, Windshield........Checking the Fluid Level . 307

.......................................Indicator . 63.....................................Operation . 71

Wheels...............Adjusting the Steering . 76............Alignment and Balance . 327

..........................Compact Spare . 338...................................Replacing . 329

..............................Wrench, Nut . 340Windows

.............................Auto Reverse . 103................Operating the Power . 102

...........................Rear, Defogger . 75Windshield

.......................................Cleaning . 71...................................Defroster . 120

.......................................Washers . 71Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 321

.....................................Operation . 71..............WMA . 133, 151, 171, 182, 206

....................................Worn Tires . 326.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 358

.............................XM Radio . 127, 161

: U.S. only

Index

V

W

X

U

X

09/07/07 15:04:13 31SVA640_399

09/07/07 15:04:15 31SVA640_400

Service Information Summary

Gasoline: Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Manual Transmission Fluid:

Power Steering Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Si:

Si:

DX, Canadian DX-G

SiDX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX, EX-L:

LX, EX, EX-L

DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX, EX-L:

DX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX, EX-L:

Si:

All models except Si andCanadian DX-G (M/T):

Honda Genuine ATF-Z1(automatic transmission fluid)(see page ).

Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 87 or higher.

13.2 US gal (50 )

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

3.9 US qt (3.7 )

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

API Premium grade 5W-30detergent oil (see page ).

4.6 US qt (4.4 )

Honda Manual TransmissionFluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30or 10W-40 motor oil as atemporary replacement (see page

).

Capacity (including differential):

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Front/Rear:32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )



Spare Tire:60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

1.5 US qt (1.4 )

1.6 US qt (1.5 )

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Premium unleaded gasoline,pump octane number of 91 orhigher recommended (see ‘‘FuelRecommendations’’ on page ).252

301

301

308

309

311

310

09/07/07 15:04:36 31SVA640_401

2010 Civic Coupe - Hondatechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/VA1010/VA1010O… · ·...

Documents

Transcript of 2010 Civic Coupe - Hondatechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/VA1010/VA1010O… · ·...